Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.4

JUNE 2018

Administrator guide
for Cisco TelePresence SX80

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
1
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Thank you for choosing Cisco!

Table of contents
Your Cisco product has been designed to give you many
years of safe, reliable operation. Introduction........................................................................................................................ 4
This part of the product documentation is aimed at User documentation and software........................................................................................ 5
administrators working with the setup and configuration of What’s new in CE9................................................................................................................. 6
the video system. SX80 at a glance.................................................................................................................. 19
Power On and Off................................................................................................................ 20
Our main objective with this Administrator guide is to
address your goals and needs. Please let us know how Front panel LEDs.................................................................................................................. 21
well we succeeded! How to administer the video system.................................................................................... 22

May we recommend that you visit the Cisco web site Configuration................................................................................................................... 26
regularly for updated versions of this guide. User administration.............................................................................................................. 27
The user documentation can be found on Change the system passphrase.......................................................................................... 28
► [Link] Restrict the access to the Settings menu............................................................................ 29
System configuration........................................................................................................... 30
Add a sign in banner............................................................................................................ 31
How to use this guide Manage the service certificates of the video system.......................................................... 32
Manage the list of trusted certificate authorities (CAs)....................................................... 33
The top menu bar and the entries in the Table of contents Set up secure audit logging................................................................................................. 34
are all hyperlinks. You can click on them to go to the topic.
Manage pre-installed certificates for CUCM via Expressway provisioning......................... 35
Delete CUCM trust lists....................................................................................................... 36
Change the persistency mode............................................................................................ 37
Set strong security mode.................................................................................................... 38
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing................................................................... 39
Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio.............................................................................. 44
Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface.................................. 46
Add a custom wallpaper...................................................................................................... 48
Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume................................................................. 49
Manage the Favorites list..................................................................................................... 50
Set up accessibility features.................................................................................................51

Peripherals....................................................................................................................... 52
Connect monitors................................................................................................................ 53
Connect input sources......................................................................................................... 55
Extend the number of input sources.................................................................................... 57
Information about displays................................................................................................... 58
Set up the SpeakerTrack feature......................................................................................... 59
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature............................................................................... 61
Set up the PresenterTrack feature....................................................................................... 64
Briefing room set-up............................................................................................................ 69

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
2
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Using extra loudspeakers and local reinforcement............................................................. 75 Standby settings................................................................................................................ 162

Connect the Touch 10 controller......................................................................................... 76 SystemUnit settings........................................................................................................... 163
Connect the ISDN Link......................................................................................................... 80 Time settings..................................................................................................................... 164
UserInterface settings........................................................................................................ 167
Maintenance.................................................................................................................... 81
UserManagement settings..................................................................................................170
Upgrade the system software............................................................................................. 82
Video settings.....................................................................................................................173
Add option keys................................................................................................................... 84
Experimental settings........................................................................................................ 183
System status...................................................................................................................... 85
Run diagnostics.................................................................................................................... 86 Appendices.................................................................................................................... 184
Download log files................................................................................................................ 87 How to use Touch 10......................................................................................................... 185
Create a remote support user............................................................................................. 88 Set up remote monitoring.................................................................................................. 186
Backup and restore configurations and custom elements.................................................. 89 Access call information while using the web interface...................................................... 187
CUCM provisioning of custom elements............................................................................. 90 Place a call using the web interface.................................................................................. 188
TMS provisioning of custom elements................................................................................. 91 Share content using the web interface.............................................................................. 190
Revert to the previously used software image.................................................................... 92 Local layout control.............................................................................................................191
Factory reset the video system........................................................................................... 93 Control a local camera....................................................................................................... 192
Factory reset Cisco Touch 10.............................................................................................. 96 Control a far end camera................................................................................................... 193
Factory reset the Cisco TelePresence Touch 10................................................................. 97 Packet loss resilience - ClearPath..................................................................................... 194
Capture user interface screenshots.................................................................................... 98 Room analytics................................................................................................................... 195
Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface.................................................... 196
System settings............................................................................................................... 99
Customize the video system's behavior using macros ..................................................... 198
Overview of the system settings....................................................................................... 100
Input source composition.................................................................................................. 199
Audio settings.................................................................................................................... 105
Manage startup scripts...................................................................................................... 201
CallHistory settings.............................................................................................................112
Access the video system’s XML files ............................................................................... 202
Cameras settings................................................................................................................113
Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface ............................... 203
Conference settings.......................................................................................................... 120
Advanced customization of audio and GPIO..................................................................... 204
FacilityService settings...................................................................................................... 125
Serial interface................................................................................................................... 205
GPIO settings..................................................................................................................... 126
Open TCP Ports................................................................................................................. 206
H323 settings......................................................................................................................127
Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS.................................................................. 207
Logging settings................................................................................................................ 130
Technical specification....................................................................................................... 208
Macros settings..................................................................................................................131
Supported RFCs.................................................................................................................210
Network settings................................................................................................................ 132
User documentation on the Cisco web site........................................................................211
NetworkServices settings.................................................................................................. 139
Cisco contacts....................................................................................................................212
Peripherals settings........................................................................................................... 145
Phonebook settings............................................................................................................147
Provisioning settings.......................................................................................................... 148
Proximity settings...............................................................................................................151
RoomAnalytics settings..................................................................................................... 152
RTP settings....................................................................................................................... 153
Security settings................................................................................................................ 154
SerialPort settings.............................................................................................................. 157
SIP settings........................................................................................................................ 158

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
3
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Chapter 1

Introduction

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
4
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

User documentation and software

Products covered in this guide User documentation Software
• Cisco TelePresence SX80 This guide provides you with the information required to Download software for the endpoint from the Cisco web
administrate the video system. site:
The guide primarilly addresses capabilities and ► [Link]
configurations of on-premise registered video systems html
(CUCM, VCS), but a sub-set of the capabilities and We recommend reading the Software release notes
configurations also applies to devices that are registered (CE9):
to our cloud service (Cisco Webex).
► [Link]
Refer to the ► User documentation on the Cisco web site collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-
appendix for more information about the guides for this series/[Link]
product.

Converting to CE software
Documentation on the Cisco web site
Before upgrading from TC software to CE software,
Visit the Cisco web site regularly for updated versions of it is important to consider the upgrade requirements;
the guides: otherwise upgrading to CE software can leave you
► [Link] with a non-functional deployment that requires you to
downgrade.
Refer to the software release notes, and the
Documentation for cloud registered devices
► Upgrade the system software chapter.
For more information on Cisco Webex room devices, visit:
► [Link]

Cisco Project Workplace

Explore the Cisco Project Workplace to find inspiration
and guidelines when preparing an office or meeting room
for video conferencing:
► [Link]

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
5
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

What’s new in CE9

This chapter provides an overview of the new and changed New features and improvements in CE9.4
system settings, and the new features and improvements in
the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9 (CE9)
compared to CE8. Rebranding from Cisco Spark to Cisco Changed default HTTP mode from
For more details, we recommend reading the Software Webex HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS
release notes: Cisco Spark has changed its name to Cisco Webex, The default value of NetworkServices HTTP Mode
► [Link] and the user interface elements that displayed Spark is changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS. This is to
endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/tsd-products- are changed to Webex. In the activation flow you now increase the security of the room devices on default
[Link] see Cisco Webex as a registration option instead of configuration. Upgrading from earlier software
Cisco Spark. versions will not automatically change the default
value and it will stay on HTTP+HTTPS to avoid
The following products have gotten new names: breaking current HTTP implementations.
• Cisco Spark Room Kit is now Cisco Webex Room
The change is seen on new systems running CE9.4.0
Kit
or later, or if the device is factory reset on CE9.4.0.
• Cisco Spark Room Kit Plus is now Cisco Webex The HTTP requests are redirect to HTTPS and
Room Kit Plus on the first visit to the device’s web interface, the
• Cisco Spark Codec Plus is now Cisco Webex device displays an “Insecure connection warning”.
Codec Plus To proceed to the web interface, you need to create
• Cisco Spark Quad Camera is now Cisco Quad an exception in your browser. This is a one-time
Camera operation unless you access the web interface with
a different browser that has never visited the device
• Cisco Spark Room 55 are now Cisco Webex web interface or if the device is factory reset.
Room 55
• Cisco Spark Room 70 are now Cisco Webex
Room 70 In-Room Control update
• Cisco DX70 is now Cisco Webex DX70 You can add buttons for as many panels as you want
• Cisco DX80 is now Cisco Webex DX80 on the home screen as well as on the in-call screen
of the user interface.

CUCM provisioning of the admin settings

lockdown configuration
The admin settings lockdown configuration, that was
introduced in CE9.2.1, can now be provisioned from
CUCM. You can lock a selection of the settings on the
settings menu on all of your devices simultaneously
when you configure them through CUCM.
Your CUCM may require a new device package in
order to expose the new fields for this configuration.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
6
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

New features and improvements in CE9.3

Backup and restore settings and custom Provisioning of custom elements In-Room Control updates
elements The backup bundle, as described above, can be The following functionality is added to the in-room control
You can include custom elements as well as provisioned to many video systems using Cisco UCM or feature:
configurations in a backup file bundle (zip). You can TMS. It is important that device specific information is
• You can add buttons for up to 20 panels in total. The
choose which of the following elements to include in the removed when creating a backup bundle intended for
buttons appear on the home screen or the in-call
bundle: multiple video systems. If you include device specific
screen of the user interface depending on the panel
information in such a bundle, you may end up with
• Branding images type.
multiple video systems that cannot be reached.
• Macros • As before, there are three types of in-room control
By provisioning a non-system specific backup bundle, panels: global panels (always available), in-call panels
• Favorites you can for example, copy a video system’s setup with (available only when in call), and out-of-call panels
• Sign-in banner macros, branding elements, and in-room control panels (only available when not in a call). The entry point for
• In-room control panels across multiple video systems. the global panel has been removed from the status
bar (top right corner of the user interface). Buttons
• Configurations (all or a sub-set) Currently, provisioning via Cisco UCM will not restore any
to open global panels are added to both the home
configurations, only the other custom elements; TMS will
In previous software versions, you could only backup the screen and the in-call screen instead, together with
restore everything that is included in the backup bundle.
configurations. the buttons for the out-of-call only and in-call only
See the release note for more details about provisioning. panels, respectively.
The backup file can either be restored manually from
the video system’s web interface, or you can generalize • You can make standalone trigger-buttons, which are
the backup bundle so that it can be provisioned across buttons that trigger an event directly, without opening
multiple video systems, for example using Cisco UCM or a panel on the user interface.
TMS. Also the following features are added in the in-room
You will find the backup and restore functionality under control editor:
Maintenance > Backup and Restore on the video system’s • Some new icons are available.
web interface.
• A set of colors to choose from for the in-room-control
buttons.
• Double click text elements to edit text directly.
• Drag and drop in-room control XML files into the
editor.
For a full description of in-room controls, see the in-room
control / customization guide on ► [Link]
com/go/in-room-control-docs

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
7
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Support for ISDN Link Resume a postponed upgrade Accessibility: Flashing screen on incoming calls
ISDN Link with software version IL1.1.7 is supported for all When you get a notification about software upgrade, you You can configure the video system so that the screen
video systems that supports CE9.3.0. can choose Upgrade now or Postpone. If you postpone and Touch controller flashes red / light grey when the
the upgrade, you can resume the upgrade from the system receives an incoming call. This feature is mainly
As before, when using automatic pairing (which allows Settings > About this device menu on the user interface targeting hearing impaired users, making it easier for
the ISDN Link to be automatically discovered by the video when you are ready; you don’t have to wait for 6 hours them to notice an incoming call.
system) IPv6 must be enabled on the video system. like you had to before.
The feature is disabled by default, and must be enabled
If you don’t manually resume the upgrade, the upgrade by the Accessibility IncomingCallNotification setting.
One Button to Push snooze will start automatically after 6 hours.
You are able to snooze an One Button to Push (OBTP) One common API guide
meeting reminder for 5 minutes. The snooze time cannot Prevent system information from being
be changed. The reminder typically appears if you are in We have gathered all API information in one API guide,
a call and a scheduled meeting is about to start. You can exposed in the user interface that covers all products. This is in contrast to earlier
snooze the reminder for 5 minutes each time it appears You can prevent important system information from being releases were we have had one API guide per product.
until the meeting has ended. exposed in the user interface, for example:
• IP addresses (video system, touch controller, UCM/
Adjust the call rate before making a call VCS registrar)
• MAC address
As soon as you start typing in the Search or dial field, you
can open a dialog and select a custom call rate. In earlier • Serial number
releases this was available only when selecting an entry • Software version
from the Directory. To enable this feature the following must be done:
If you don’t select a custom call rate, you get the rate set • A passphrase must be set for all users with
in the Conference DefaultCall Rate setting. administrator rights
• UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode must be set to
Locked
Select ring-tone and adjust ring-tone volume
• UserInterface Security Mode must be set to Strong
You can select a ring-tone and adjust the ring-tone
This feature also means that the IP address is not
volume from the settings menu on the user interface.
displayed on the screen when you disconnect a Touch
In the previous releases this was done from the web
controller.
interface.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
8
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

New features and improvements in CE9.2

Macro framework Source composition Cisco Spark Quad Camera support

The macro framework allows users and integrators to You can compose up to four input sources (depending on You can connect a Cisco Spark Quad Camera to the
write JavaScript macros in order to automate scenarios how many input sources are available on the codec) into SX80. Note that the Quad Camera uses only one of the
and customize endpoint behavior so that it suites an one image. This is the image that will be sent in the main codec’s HDMI inputs, while the SpeakerTrack 60 camera
individual customer’s requirements. video stream to the far end in a call. Source composition uses two. The People Count feature (in call) is also
can only be enabled via the API, so we recommend available when using the Quad Camera.
The combination of macros and powerful features such as creating a user interface extension combined with a
listening for events/status changes, automating execution macro to control the compositions on demand.
of commands and configurations, and providing local Support for the Snap to Whiteboard feature
control functionality for the In-Room control feature, This feature replaces some of the functionality that was
provides many possibilities for custom setups. provided by the TC Console application for TC software. The Snap to Whiteboard feature is now available for
all products that have a camera with speaker track
Minor behavioral changes, such as having the video functionality: SX80 with Cisco TelePresence Speaker
system in Do Not Disturb for an infinite amount of time, HTTP Proxy support Track 60 camera or Cisco Spark Quad camera, MX700/
can be easily realized by macros. Some other examples MX800 with dual camera, Room Kit, Room Kit Plus, Room
are: Reset configurations automatically, make a call at a You can set up the video system to go through a HTTP 55 and Room 70.
certain time of the day, and issue alert or help messages Proxy when registering it to Cisco’s cloud service, Cisco
depending on status changes. Spark. When the video system detects a person that is speaking
close to the whiteboard, the camera view will switch to
The macro editor, which also provides several example the whiteboard area. The wizard in the Settings panel
macros, is available from the video system’s web User interface features on the Touch 10 user interface helps you to set up the
interface. • The Settings panel is restructured. feature and define where the whiteboard area is.
• The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch
Branding and halfwake customization 10) can be protected by the video system’s admin Briefing Room mode
password. If the password is blank, anyone can
You can upload your own text and images to customize access the Settings and factory reset the system. The Briefing Room feature, which was introduced already
the appearance of the screen and user interface in both in TC software, has been reworked. The in-room control
• If you select the Russian language on the user
the halfwake state and the awake state. framework is used for creating the associated user
interface, you can choose between a Russian
interface elements.
In the Halfwake state you can: keyboard and a keyboard with a Latin character set.
• Add a background brand image to the screen and • Arabic and Hebrew languages are added to the user
user interface. interface. Also localized keyboards are included. Briefing Room is supported when a speaker track
camera, a Precision 60 camera, and three screens are
• Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the • Basic IEEE 802.1x settings are added to the Settings
connected. The speaker track camera can be either Cisco
screen and user interface. panel in the user interface.
TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 or Cisco Spark Quad
In the Awake state you can: Camera.
• Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the
screen and user interface.
• Add a label or message in the bottom left corner of
the screen (not the user interface).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
9
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Mute and unmute remote participants in a CMS API commands for user management Automatic factory reset when changing the call
hosted conference (Active Control) You can create and manage user accounts directly using service (device activation)
When a video system is enabled for Active Control in a API commands (xCommand UserManagement User *). As The video system will automatically factory reset and
CMS (2.1 or later) conference you can mute and unmute before, you can also do this from the video system’s user restart when using the user interface to change the
remote participants from the participant list on the user interface. device activation method, for example from VCS to Cisco
interface (the feature must also be enabled on the CMS). UCM. This will prevent conflicting configurations when
provisioning the video system to a new service.
A video system that is running software version CE9.2 will Preview mode for In-Room Controls
not be unmuted directly. When you try to unmute such Changing the provisioning from the API will not
The In-Room Control editor has a new preview mode.
a video system remotely, a message will show up on its automatically factory reset the video system.
A virtual Touch 10 user interface shows how the
screen requesting the user to unmute the audio locally.
design looks on the user interface. The user interface
is interactive so that you can test the functionality. It Support for separate RTP port ranges for audio
API commands for Custom input prompt produces real events on the video system, which can
trigger any functionality you have created with a third-
and other media
API commands are introduced to allow for an input prompt party control system or with a macro. A console in You can configure the video system so that audio uses
in the user interface: xCommand UserInterface Message the right pane displays both the widget values when a different RTP port range than other media. The two
TextInput *. When issuing the display command a interacted with, and control system feedback messages. ranges cannot overlap. As default, all media use the same
prompt with your custom text, a text input field for RTP port range.
the user, and a submit button, shows up on the user
interface. For example, you can prompt a user to leave Intelligent Proximity changes
feedback after an ended call. You can specify what type
A Proximity indicator is displayed on the screen (middle
of input you want from the user: single line text, numeric,
right) to inform that one or more clients are paired to the
password, or PIN code.
system with Cisco Proximity. The old indicator (top left),
The prompt can only be enabled via the API, so it is which was always shown when Proximity was enabled,
recommended to combine it with macros and either a has been removed.
custom user interface panel or an auto-triggered event.
You can no longer disable the Proximity services from the
user interface.
Certificate upload via API The ultrasound settings have moved from Peripherals
ASCII PEM formatted certificates can be installed Pairing Ultrasound to Audio Ultrasound.
directly using multiline API commands (xCommand
Security Certificates CA Add, or xCommand Security
Certificates Services Add). You can also upload
certificates to a video system from its web interface, as
before.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
10
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

New features and improvements in CE9.1

Dual Screen experience and Active Control for

CMS based meetings
Dual screen video systems can utilize both screens
for video in a CMS based meeting. The video system
receives two transcoded video streams and one content
stream from the CMS, and utilizes both screens to render
the streams.
With Active Control enabled, you get a participant list
that shows all meeting participants and their current
activity status, such as mute, sharing and active speaker
indication. You can change the layout seamlessly from the
touch interface by using the layout selection panels.

New wake-up experience

The wake-up experience has two additional standby
states: Halfwake and Standby with motion detection.
When automatic wake-up is enabled, the video system
detects presence using ultrasound (motion detection) or
when pairing to a Cisco Proximity client. The video system
wakes up with a greeting before going into the Halfwake
state, which has a simple on-screen interaction guide.

Additions for Room Analytics

Detect people presence in the room: The video system
has the capability to find whether there are people
present in the room. The feature is based on ultrasound,
and it does not keep record of who was in the room, only
whether or not the room is in use.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
11
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

New features and improvements in CE9.0

Updated user interface Updated In-Room Control editor

The user interfaces on the Touch 10, on screen, and on The In-Room Control editor is updated with a new look,
integrated touch screens have been updated. The main improved logic and usability for producing a control
menu items on the home screen have been replaced with interface more efficiently. In addition, a new directional
more prominent activities. pad widget and an In-Room Control simulator is added.
Some of the settings have been removed from the Touch
10 advanced settings menu to align with the on-screen Added language support
display menu.
We have added support for Potuguese (Portugal) to the
on-screen display and Touch controller menus.
Wakeup on motion detection
Wakeup on motion detection senses when a person walks Other changes
into the conference room and the video system wakes up
• Support for HTTPS client certificates has been added.
automatically. You need to enable the following setting for
this feature to work: • Unplugging the presentation cable stops the
presentation sharing instantly.
xConfiguration Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
You can’t manually set the video system in standby when
this feature is enabled.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
12
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

System configuration changes in CE9.4

New configurations Configurations that are modified

Conference FarendMessage Mode Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode
SIP MinimumTLSVersion OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN
Network [1] Speed
Configurations that are removed OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTP Mode
OLD: Default value: HTTP+HTTPS
NEW: Default value: HTTPS
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP Mode
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Video Output Connector [3] Resolution
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
13
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

System configuration changes in CE9.3

New configurations Configurations that are modified

Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl OLD: Default value: True
NEW: Default value: False
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode
OLD: Value space: Manual/Off
SystemUnit CrashReporting URL NEW: Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
UserInterface Security Mode OLD: Value space: Integer (0..100); Default value: 0
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..20); Default value: 20
Configurations that are removed Security Session MaxTotalSessions
Provisioning HttpMethod OLD: Value space: Integer (0..100); Default value: 0
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..20); Default value: 20

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
14
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

System configuration changes in CE9.2

New configurations Configurations that are removed

Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel
Replacing Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel Replaced by Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
Audio Ultrasound Mode Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Mode
Replacing Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Model Replaced by Audio Ultrasound Mode
Macros AutoStart
Macros Mode Configurations that are modified
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed Cameras Camera[n] Focus Mode

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName OLD: Value space: Auto/Manual

NEW: Value space: Auto/AutoLimited/Manual
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
RTP Video Ports Range Start Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
RTP Video Ports Range Stop OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Security Session MaxFailedLogins Security Audit Logging Mode

OLD: Default value: Off
UserInterface CustomMessage
NEW: Default value: Internal
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
UserInterface Language
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
NEW: Arabic and Hebrew added to valuespace

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
15
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

System configuration changes in CE9.1

New configurations Configurations that are modified

RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector Conference DefaultCall Rate
OLD: Default value: 3072
Configurations that are removed NEW: Default value: 6000

None. Conference MultiStream Mode

OLD: Valuespace: Off; Default value: Off
NEW: Valuespace: Auto/Off; Default value: Auto
Network[ 1] IEEE8021X Password
OLD: Valuespace: String(0, 32)
NEW: Valuespace: String(0, 50)
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels
OLD: Default value: NotSet
NEW: Default value: Minimum1
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
OLD: Valuespace: AutoShare/Manual/OnConnect
NEW: Valuespace: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
16
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

System configuration changes in CE9.0

New configurations Configurations that are modified

Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup Cameras Camera [n] *
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity
Cameras PresenterTrack *
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Cameras SpeakerTrack *
Configurations that are removed
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
UserInterface UserPreferences NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Conference VideoBandwidth PresentationChannel Weight Conference MultiStream Mode
Standby AudioMotionDetection OLD: Value space: Auto/Off
NEW: Value space: Off
UserInterface Language
NEW: Portuguese added to value space

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
17
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Configurations with the new INTEGRATOR user role Time Zone

A new user role - INTEGRATOR - is introduced in CE9.0. It has been added to the following UserInterface OSD Output
configurations:
UserInterface Wallpaper
Audio DefaultVolume
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition
Audio Input HDMI [n] *
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId
Audio Input Line [n] *
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode
Audio Input Microphone [n] *
Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement *
Video Input Connector [n] Name
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile
Audio Output HDMI [n] *
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
Audio Output Line [n] *
Video Input Connector [n] Quality
Audio SoundsAndAlerts *
Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange
CallHistory Mode
Video Input Connector [n] Visibility
Cameras Camera [n] *
Video Monitors
Cameras PowerLine Frequency
Video Output Connector [n] *
Cameras PresenterTrack *
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
Cameras SpeakerTrack *
Video Selfview Default *
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Video Selfview OnCall *
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout
FacilityService *
GPIO Pin [n] Mode
<path> * means that the change applies to all configurations starting with <path>.

Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel

Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Mode
Peripherals Profile *
SerialPort BaudRate
SerialPort Mode
Standby *
SystemUnit Name

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
18
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

SX80 at a glance
The Cisco TelePresence SX80 codec provides a powerful
and flexible platform for creating video collaboration
experiences. SX80 was built with the integrator in mind,
enabling flexibility and creativity for customized video
collaboration rooms. SX80 acts as the audio and video
engine to incorporate high-definition video collaboration
applications into large meeting rooms, boardrooms and
purpose-built or vertical application rooms.
SX80 delivers up to a 1080p60 end-to-end high definition
(HD) video and offers industry-first support for H.265 (in SIP
calls). The codec offers a rich input and output set, flexible
media engine, and support for three screens enable various
use cases.
Cisco offers SX80 as a single unit, and in the following
integrator packages:
• SX80 and Precision 40 (PrecisionHD 1080p4xS2) camera
for smaller meeting rooms
• SX80 and Precision 60 camera for medium to large-sized
meeting rooms
• SX80 and SpeakerTrack 60 dual camera system for
medium to large-sized meeting rooms. Detects and
switches between active speakers (speaker tracking)
• SX80 and Cisco Quad Camera for medium to large- Features and benefits
sized meeting rooms. The Quad Camera has integrated • The codec is compatible with standards-based • The systems support H.323 and SIP with bandwidth
loudspeakers, and detects and switches between active video systems without loss of features. up to 6 Mbps point-to-point.
speakers (speaker tracking).
• Operation using Cisco TelePresence Touch 10 user • Up to 10 Mbps total MultiSite bandwidth.
SX80 also has basic support for the PrecisionHD 1080p12x interface, or with an external control device using • Full duplex audio with high-quality stereo sound.
camera (camera software upgrade not supported natively by the API (no IR and remote control).
codec, Daisy chaining not supported). • Video resolution and frame rate up to 1080p60.
• Simple one-button-to-push to join scheduled
meetings. • Support for 1080p30 content and 1080p60 video
simultaneously.
• Embedded MultiSite conferencing option that
allows up to four additional participants (individual • Full application programming interface (API).
transcoding, no external bridge). • Ability to connect up to four HD sources and eight
• Cisco TelePresence ClearPath packet loss microphones.
protection technology. • Ability to connect to up to three monitors or output
• Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) devices.
native support. Requires CUCM version 8.6 or • Professional-grade connectors.
higher. • One rack unit (1RU) high, rack-mountable.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
19
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Power On and Off

Power On/Off with the Power switch or Shutdown button Restart and standby using the user
interface

Restart the system

1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of
the user interface.

2. Select Settings, followed by Restart.

3. Select Restart again to confirm your choice.

The power switch on the codec’s rear side is its main Power
On/Off switch. switch Enter/exit standby mode
It may take a few minutes for the codec to start up. The 1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of
Power LED lights steadily when the system is ready for the user interface.
use.
2. Select Standby.

Power Off or restart the system remotely

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Restart.

Restart the system

Click Restart device... and confirm your choice.
It takes a few minutes before the system is ready for use.
Shutdown You can use the Shutdown button on the front panel to
button switch the codec On and Off, provided that the Power Power Off the system
switch on the codec’s rear side is On.
Click Shutdown device... and confirm your choice.
• To switch Off the codec, hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
You cannot power the system on again remotely.
• To switch On the codec, hold the button until the
LEDs flash. It may take a few minutes for the codec For the system to power up after a remote
to start up. The system is ready for use when the shutdown, turn the power switch Off and then On.
Power LED lights steadily.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
20
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Front panel LEDs

Front panel LEDs

Power:
Blinks when the system is starting up.
Steady light when the codec is ready for use.
Pulsates when the codec is in standby.

In Call:
Steady light when in call.

IR:
Not in use.

Alarm:
Lights steady when a serious error occurs.

More information about the codec’s physical interface,

including the connector panel and LEDs, are described in
the Physical interface guide.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
21
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

How to administer the video system (page 1 of 4)

In general, we recommend you to use the web interface
to administer and maintain the video system, as Access method Notes How to enable/disable the methods
described in this administrator guide. HTTP/HTTPS • Used by the web interface of the video system NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode
Alternatively, you can access the API of the video • Non-secure (HTTP) or secure (HTTPS) Restart the video system for changes
system by other methods: communication to take effect
• HTTP or HTTPS (also used by the web interface) • HTTPS: Enabled by default
• SSH • HTTP: Enabled by default only for video systems
that have been upgraded to CE9.4 (or later) from
• Telnet
an earlier software version, provided that the
• Serial interface (RS-232) video system has not been factory reset after the
If you want more information about the different access upgrade.
methods, and how to use the API, refer to the API guide
Telnet • Non-secure TCP/IP connection NetworkServices > Telnet > Mode
for the video system.
• Disabled by default You do not need to restart the video
system. It may take some time for
changes to take effect

Tip SSH • Secure TCP/IP connection NetworkServices > SSH > Mode
If the configuration or status is available in the API, the • Enabled by default You do not need to restart the video
web interface setting or status translates into an API system. It may take some time for
configuration or status as follows: changes to take effect
Set X > Y > Z to Value (web) Serial interface (RS-232) • Connect to the video system with a cable. IP- SerialPort > Mode
is the same as address, DNS, or a network is not required
xConfiguration X Y Z: Value (API) Restart the video system for changes
• Enabled by default to take effect
Check X > Y > Z status (web) • We recommend using the default baud rate,
is the same as because the video system may return much
xStatus X Y Z (API) feedback (SerialPort > BaudRate)
• For security reasons, you are asked to sign in by
For example:
default (SerialPort > LoginRequired)
Set SystemUnit > Name to MySystem
is the same as
If all access methods are disabled (set to Off), you can no longer configure the video system. You are not able to re-
xConfiguration SystemUnit Name: MySystem enable (set to On) any of the access methods, and you must factory reset the video system to recover.
Check SystemUnit > Software > Version status
is the same as
xStatus SystemUnit Software Version
More settings and statuses are available in the web
interface than in the API.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
22
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

How to administer the video system (page 2 of 4)

The web interface of the video system

The web interface is the administration portal for
the video system. You can connect from a computer
Connect to the video system
and administer the system remotely. It provides full Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the
configuration access and offers tools and mechanisms video system in the address bar.
for maintenance.
Note: The web interface requires that HTTP or HTTPS
is enabled (refer to NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode How to find the IP address
setting). 1. Select the contact information in the
upper left corner of the user interface.
2. Select Settings, followed by About this
We recommend that you use the latest release of one device.
of the major web browsers.

Sign in
Enter user name and passphrase for the endpoint and
click Sign In.

The system is delivered with a default user

named admin with no passphrase. Leave the
Passphrase field blank when signing in for the
first time.
It is mandatory to set a password for the
admin user.

Sign out
Hover the mouse over
the user name and
choose Signout from
the drop-down list.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
23
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

How to administer the video system (page 3 of 4)

How the web interface is organized

The web interface is organized in sub-pages. All sub-pages
shown below are available if the video system is registerd to an
on-premise service (CUCM, VCS); the pages shown in grey color
are not available if the video system is registered to the Cisco
cloud service (Cisco Webex).
In both cases, a user that is signed in, sees only the pages that he
has access rights for.
Read more about user administration, user roles and access
rights in the ► User administration chapter.

Main menu

Home Call Control Setup Security Maintenance Integration

Configuration Users Diagnostics In-Room Control
Status Service Certificates System Logs Macro Editor
Peripherals CUCM Certificates Call Logs Startup Scripts
Personalization Certificate Authorities User Interface Screenshots Developer API
Favorites Strong Security Mode Software Upgrade
Room Types Sign In Banner Option Keys
Presenter Tracking Non-persistent Mode Backup and Restore
System Recovery
Restart

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
24
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction
Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

How to administer the video system (page 4 of 4)

Settings and system information on the user interface

You have access to system information, and some basic Access Settings
configurations and system tests on the video system’s user
interface. 1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface.
System-critical settings and functions, such as network settings,
service activation, and factory reset, may be protected by a 2. Select Settings.
passphrase, refer to the ► Restrict the access to the Settings
menu chapter. A padlock symbol indicates that a setting is protected
(locked down).

Some of the settings and tests are also part of the Setup assistant 3. Select the setting you want to change, or the test you want to
that is launched when the video system is powered up for the run.
first time. The Setup assistant is described in the Getting Started If a setting is locked down, an authentication window pops up,
Guide for systems running CE software. and you have to sign in with ADMIN credentials to proceed.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
25
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Chapter 2

Configuration

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
26
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

User administration
You have to sign in to get access to the web and command line Edit an existing user account User roles
interfaces. You can assign different roles to users, to determine
what they should have access to. If you make changes to a user that holds the Admin role, you must A user account may hold one or a
always enter your own passphrase in the Your passphrase input combination of user roles. A user account
field for verification. with full access rights, like the default
admin user, should possess the ADMIN,
The default user account USER and AUDIT roles.
The video system comes with a default administrator user
Change the user privileges
These are the user roles:
account with full access rights. The user name is admin and no 1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
passphrase is initially set. ADMIN: A user with this role can create
Security > Users.
new users, change most settings, make
2. Click the appropriate user in the list. calls, and search the contact lists. The
It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the admin user. user cannot upload audit certificates and
3. Choose user roles, set the status to Acitve or change the security audit settings.
Inactive, and decide if the user has to change the
passphrase on the next sign in. USER: A user with this role can make
Read how to set the passphrase in the ► Change the system calls and search the contact lists. The
passphrase chapter. Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished user can modify a few settings, for
Name) field only if you use certificate login on example adjust the ringtone volume and
HTTPS. set the time and date format.
Create a new user account 4. Click Edit User to save the changes. AUDIT: A user with this role can change
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users. the security audit settings and upload
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
audit certificates.
2. Click Add new user....
ROOMCONTROL: A user with this role
Change the passphrase can create in-room controls. The user
3. Fill in the Username, Passphrase and Repeat passphrase input
fields. has access to the In-room control editor
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
and corresponding development tools.
As a default, the user has to change the passphrase when he
2. Click the appropriate user in the list. INTEGRATOR: A user with this role has
signs in for the first time.
3. Enter the new passphrase in the appropriate input fields. access to settings, commands and status
Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished Name) field only that are required to set up advanced AV
if you use client certificates for authentication. scenarios, and to integrate our video
4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.
systems with 3rd party equipment. Such a
4. Check the appropriate Roles check boxes. Use the Back button to leave without making any changes. user can also create in-room controls.
If you assign the ADMIN role to a user, enter your own
passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification. Delete the user account Cisco Webex registered systems
5. Set the Status to Active to activate the user. 1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users. If a video system is registered to Cisco’s
6. Click Create User. cloud service (Cisco Webex), only
2. Click the appropriate user in the list. local users with the INTEGRATOR and
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes. ROOMCONTROL user roles are available.
3. Click Delete user... and confirm when prompted.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
27
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Change the system passphrase

You need to know the system passphrase in order to: Change your passphrase
• Sign in to the web interface
1. Sign in to the web interface, hover the mouse over the user
• Sign in and use the command line interfaces
name, and choose Change Passphrase in the drop down list.

The default user account 2. Enter the current passphrase and new passphrase in the input
fields, and click Change passphrase.
The video system is delivered with a default user account with
The passphrase format is a string with 0–64 characters.
full access rights. The user name is admin, and initially, no
passphrase is set.
If the passphrase currently is not set, leave the Current
passphrase field blank.
It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the default admin
user in order to restrict access to system configuration. It
is also mandatory to set a passphrase for any other user
with ADMIN rights.

A warning, saying that the system passphrase is not set, is shown

on screen until a passphrase is set for the admin user. Change another user’s passphrase
If you have administrator access rights, you can change the
password of any user.
Other user accounts
You can create many user accounts for the video system. 1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.

Read more about how to create and manage user accounts in the 2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
► User administration chapter.
3. Enter the new passphrase in the Passphrase and Repeat
passphrase input fields.
If the user holds the Admin role, you must enter your own
passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.

4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.

Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
28
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Restrict the access to the Settings menu

By default, any user has access to the Settings menu on the user The Settings menu on the user interface
interface.
If the menu is locked down, you must sign in to access the
We recommend that you restrict the access to prevent system-critical settings.
unauthorized users from changing the configuration of the video
system. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface followed by Settings, in order to open the Settings
menu.

Lock down the Settings menu

1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Setup > Configuration.

2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode, and select

Locked.

3. Click Save for the change to take effect.

Now a user has to sign in with ADMIN credentials to get
access to the system-critical settings on the user interface
(Touch controller).

Unlock the Settings menu

1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Setup > Configuration.

2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode, and select

Unlocked.

3. Click Save for the change to take effect.

Now any user has access to the complete Settings menu on
the user interface (Touch controller). Locked down settings Unlock settings
Locked down settings are marked with a padlock. If you click on the padlock, you are asked
to sign in with an ADMIN user.
Once signed in, you can access all
settings until you close the Settings
menu.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
29
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

System configuration
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Change a system setting About system settings
Configuration.
All system settings can be changed from
Check the value space the web interface.
Find a system setting A settings’s value space is specified either by text following Each system setting is described in the
the input field or in a drop-down list that opens when you ► System settings chapter.
click the arrow.
Search for settings
Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All settings Different settings may require different
that contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Settings user credentials. In order to be sure that
that have these letters in their value space are also shown. an administrator is able to change all
system settings, an administrator user
must possess all user roles.
You can read more about user
administration and user roles in the
► User administration chapter.
Change a value
1. Choose the preferred value from the drop-down list, or
enter new text in the input field.

2. Click Save for the change to take effect.

Use the Undo or Revert buttons if you do not want to
make any changes.

Select a category and navigate to settings

The system settings are grouped in categories. Choose a
category in the left pane to show the associated settings.

Categories with unsaved changes are marked with an edit

symbol ( ).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
30
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Add a sign in banner

Sign in to the web interface, and navigate About sign in banner
to Security > Sign In Banner.
If a system administrator wants to provide
1. Enter the message that you want to initial information to all users, he can
present to the user when he signs in. create a sign in banner. The message is
2. Click Save to activate the banner. shown when the user signs in to the web
interface or the command line interface.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
31
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Manage the service certificates of the video system

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Service You need the following files: About the service
Certificates. • Certificate (file format: .PEM)
certificates of the video
• Private key, either as a separate file or included in the same
file as the certificate (file format: .PEM format) system
• Passphrase (required only if the private key is encrypted) Certificate validation may be required
The certificate and the private key will be stored in the same file when using TLS (Transport Layer
on the video system. Security).
A server or client may require that the
video system presents a valid certificate
to them before communication can be
set up.
The video system’s certificates are text
files that verify the authenticity of the
system. These certificates may be issued
by a certificate authority (CA).
Enable or disable, view or
Certificates are used for the following
delete a certificate services: HTTPS server, SIP, IEEE 802.1X
Use the On and Off buttons to and audit logging.
enable or disable a certificate for You can store many certificates on the
the different services. video system, but only one certificate can
Use the corresponding button to be enabled for each service at a time.
view or delete a certificate. If authentication fails, the connection will
not be established.

Add a certificate
1. Browse to find the Certificate
file and Private key file (optional)
on your computer.

2. Fill in the Passphrase if required.

3. Click Add certificate... to store

the certificate on the video
system.

The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
32
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Manage the list of trusted certificate authorities (CAs)

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate You need the following file: About trusted CAs
Authorities, and open the Custom CAs tab.
• CA certificate list (file format: .PEM).
Certificate validation may be required
when using TLS (Transport Layer
Security).
The video system may be set up to
require that a server or client presents
its certificate to the video system before
communication can be set up.
The certificates are text files that verify
the authenticity of a server or client. The
certificates must be signed by a trusted
CA.
View or delete a certificate
In order to verify the signature of the
Use the corresponding button to
certificates, a list of trusted CAs must
view or delete a certificate.
reside on the video system.
The list must include all CAs needed in
order to verify certificates for both audit
logging and other connections.
Upload a list of If authentication fails, the connection will
certificate authorities not be established.

1. Browse to find the file

containing a list of CA
The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.
certificates on your computer
(file format: .PEM).

2. Click Add certificate authority... Previously stored certificates are not deleted
to store the new CA certificates automatically.
on the video system.
The entries in a new file with CA certificates
are appended to the existing list.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
33
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up secure audit logging

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Setup > Configuration. The certificate authority (CA) that verifies the certificate About secure audit logging
of the audit server must be in the video system’s list of
trusted certificate authorities. Otherwise, logs will not be When audit logging is enabled, all sign in
sent to the external server. activity and configuration changes on the
video system are recorded.
Refer to the ► Manage the list of trusted certificate
authorities (CAs) chapter how to update the list. Use the Security > Audit > Logging >
Mode setting to enable audit logging.
Audit logging is disabled by default.
In ExternalSecure audit logging mode
1. Open the Security category. the video system sends encrypted audit
logs to an external audit server (syslog
2. Find the Audit > Server server), which identity must be verified by
settings, and enter the a signed certificate.
Address of the audit server.
The signature of the audit server is
If you set PortAssignment to verified using the same CA list as other
Manual, you must also enter servers/clients.
a Port number for the audit
server. If the audit server authentication fails, no
audit logs are sent to the external server.
3. Set Audit > Logging > Mode
to ExternalSecure.

4. Click Save for the change to

take effect.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
34
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Manage pre-installed certificates for CUCM via Expressway provisioning

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate About pre-installed
Authorities, and open the Preinstalled CAs tab.
certificates
The pre-installed certificates in this
list are only used when the video
system is provisioned by Cisco Unified
Communications Manager (CUCM) via
Expressway (Edge).
Only Cisco Expressway infrastructure
certificates are checked against this list.
If the validation of the Cisco Expressway
infrastructure certificate fails, the video
system will not be provisioned and
registered.
Factory resetting the video system
does not delete the list of pre-installed
certificates.
View or disable certificates
Use the Details... and Disable
buttons respectively, to view or
disable certificates.

The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.

As an alternative to using the pre-installed certificates, you

can append the certificates you need to the certificate list
manually.
Refer to the ► Manage the list of trusted certificate
authorities (CAs) chapter how to update the list of trusted
certificates.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
35
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Delete CUCM trust lists

The information in this chapter is only relevant for video systems Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > More information about trust
that are registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager CUCM Certificates.
(CUCM). lists
Delete the CUCM trust lists For more information about CUCM and
trust lists, read the Deployment guide for
Click Delete CTL/ITL to remove the trust lists. TelePresence endpoints on CUCM that is
available on the Cisco web site.

As a general rule, you should not delete old CTL

(Certificate Trust List) and ITL (Initial Trust List) files.
In these cases, you must still delete them:
• When you change the CUCM IP address.
• When you move the endpoint between CUCM
clusters.
• When you need to re-generate or change the CUCM
certificate.

Overview of trust list fingerprints and certificates

The trust lists’ fingerprints and an overview of the certificates in
the lists are displayed on the web page.
This information may be useful for troubleshooting.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
36
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Change the persistency mode

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Persistency mode
Non-persistent Mode.
Configurations, call history, internal
logs, local phonebook (local directory
and favorites list), and IP connectivity
Check the persistency status Change the persistency settings information are stored by default.
The active radio buttons show the current persistency status of All persistency settings are set to Persistent by default. You only Because all persistency settings are set
the video system. have to change these settings if you want to make them Non- to Persistent, a system restart does not
persistent. delete this information.
Alternatively, you can navigate to Setup > Status, and then open
the Security category to see the Persistency status. Generally, we recommend you NOT to
1. Click the radio buttons to set the persistency for change the persistency settings. Only
configurations, call history, internal logging, local phonebook change to Non-persistent mode if
(local directory and favorites) and IP connectivity (DHCP) you have to prevent users from being
information. able to see or traceback to any logged
2. Click Save and reboot.... information from the previous session

The video system restarts automatically. After the restart, the In Non-persistent mode, the following
behavior changes according to the new persistency settings. information is lost or cleared each time
the system restarts:
• System configuration changes
Logs, configurations, and other data that was stored • Information about placed and
before you switched to Non-persistent mode, are NOT reveived calls (call history)
cleared or deleted.
• Internal log files
• Changes to the local contacts or
favorites list
• All IP related information (DHCP) from
the last session

Information that was stored before

changing to Non-persistent mode
is not automatically cleared or
deleted. You must factory reset
the video system to delete such
information.
There is more information about
performing a factory reset in the
► Factory reset the video system
chapter.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
37
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set strong security mode

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > About strong security mode
Strong Security Mode.
Use strong security mode only when
compliance with DoD JITC regulations is
required.
Strong security mode sets very strict
passphrase requirements, and requires all
users to change their passphrase on the
next sign in.

Set strong security mode

Read carefully about the consequences of strong
security mode before you continue.
1. If you want to use strong security mode, click
Enable Strong Security Mode.... and confirm
your choice in the dialog box that appears.
The video system restarts automatically.

2. Change the passphrase when you are

prompted. The new passphrase must meet the
strict criteria as described.
How to change the system passphrase is
described in the ► Change the system
passphrase chapter.

Return to normal mode

Click Disable Strong Security Mode... in order to
restore the video system to normal mode. Confirm
your choice in the dialog box that appears.
The video system restarts automatically.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
38
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 1 of 5)

Cisco Proximity allows users to see, control, capture and share Proximity services
content directly on their own mobile devices (smartphone, tablet,
or laptop), when the device is near a video system. Place calls and control the video system:

The mobile device can automatically pair with the video system • Dial, mute, adjust volume, hang up
when it comes within range of ultrasound transmitted by the video • Available on smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)
system. View shared content on a mobile device:
• View shared content, review previous slides, save selected slides
• Available on smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)
• For DX70 and DX80, this service is available only when in a call
Wireless share from a desktop client:
• Share content without connecting a presentation cable
• Available on laptops (OS X and Windows)

The number of simultaneous Proximity connections depends

on the type of video system. The client warns new users if the
maximum number of connections has been reached.

Maximum number of
Video system connections
Room Kit, Room 55, Room 70 30 / 7 *

Codec Plus 30 / 7 *

SX80 10 Place calls and control the video system View shared content on a mobile device
SX10, SX20 7
MX700, MX800 10
MX200 G2, MX300 G2 7
DX70, DX80 3

*
30 connections when the View shared content on a mobile device Proximity Wireless share from a mobile device
service is disabled; 7 connections when this service is enabled.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
39
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 2 of 5)

Install a Cisco Proximity client

Where to find the clients Supported operating systems

You can download the Cisco Proximity clients for smartphones • iOS 7 and above
and tablets (Android and iOS), and laptops (Windows and OS X) • Android 4.0 and above
free of charge from ► [Link]
• Mac OS X 10.9 and above
Clients for smartphones and tablets are also available directly
through Google Play (Android) and Apple App Store (iOS). • Windows 7 and above
The tile based interface introduced with Windows 8 is not
supported.
End-user license agreement
Read the end-user license agreement carefully,
► [Link]
English/EU1KEN_.html

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
40
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 3 of 5)

Ultrasound emission
Cisco video systems emit ultrasound as part of the Proximity Headsets
feature.
DX70, DX80, and SX10N:
Use the Proximity > Mode setting to switch the Proximity feature -
and thereby also ultrasound emission - On and Off. You can always use a headset with these systems because:

Most people are exposed to ultrasound more or less daily in many • DX70 and DX80 have dedicated headset outputs, on which we
environments, including industry, commercial applications and never emit ultrasound.
home appliances. • SX10N plays ultrasound on the built-in loudspeakers.
Ultrasound is never emitted on the HDMI or audio outputs.
Even if airborne ultrasound may cause subjective effects for some
individuals, it is very unlikely that any effects will occur for levels Room 70, Room 55, Room Kit, Room Kit Plus, Codec Plus, SX10,
below 75 dB. SX20, SX80, and MX Series:

Room 70, Room 55, Room Kit, Room Kit Plus, SX10N and MX • These systems are not designed for headset use.
Series: • We strongly recommend you to switch off ultrasound emission
if you use a headset with these video systems (set Proximity >
• The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a
Mode to Off). Then you cannot use the Proximity feature.
distance of 50 cm or more from the loudspeaker.
• Since these systems don’t have dedicated headset outputs,
DX70 and DX80: we are not able to control the sound pressure level from the
• The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a connected headsets.
distance of 20 cm or more from the loudspeaker.

Codec Plus, SX10, SX20, and SX80:

• We cannot foresee the ultrasound sound pressure level on
these video systems, because they emit ultrasound on third-
party loudspeakers.
The volume control on the loudspeaker itself, and the Audio >
Ultrasound > MaxVolume setting affect the ultrasound sound
pressure level; the volume control on the remote control or
Touch controller does not have any effect.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
41
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 4 of 5)

Enable Proximity services The Proximity indicator About Proximity
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > You can see the Proximity indicator on the screen as long The Proximity feature is switched Off by
Configuration. as at least one Proximity client is paired with the system. default, because the use of third-party
speakers may need additional testing for
2. Go to Proximity > Mode, and switch Proximity On. The indicator doesn't disappear immediately when the last Proximity to work as expected. In rare
client unpairs. It may take a few minutes. cases the ultrasound may cause audio
The video system starts sending ultrasound pairing
messages. artifacts. If so, consider to decrease the
maximum ultrasound volume with the
3. Enable the services you want to allow. Only Wireless share Audio > Ultrasound > MaxVolume setting.
from a desktop client is enabled by default.
When Proximity is switched On, the
In order to fully utilise the Proximity functionality, we video system transmits ultrasound pairing
recommend that you enable all services. messages.
Place calls and control the video system: The ultrasound pairing messages are
• Go to Proximity > Services > CallControl and choose received by nearby devices with Proximity
Enabled. clients, and triggers the authentication
and authorization of the device.
View shared content on a mobile device:
• Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > ToClients
and choose Enabled. Provided that you have verified that
Proximity is suitable in your setup,
Wireless share from a desktop client:
Cisco recommends - for the best user
• Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > FromClients experience - that Proximity always is
and choose Enabled. switched On*.
In order to get full access to Proximity,
the Proximity services (Proximity >
Services > ...) must be Enabled as well.

*
We recommend not to use a headset, if you have
switched on Proximity (ultrasound).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
42
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 5 of 5)

Room considerations Basic troubleshooting Additional resources
Cisco Intelligent Proximity site:
Room acoustics Cannot detect devices with Proximity clients ► [Link]
• Rooms with hard surfaces may cause challenges due to • Check if the video system is in standby mode. Ultrasound is Support forum:
severe audio reflections. Acoustical treatment of meeting not transmitted if the speakers (for example a TV in standby ► [Link]
rooms is always highly recommended for the best meeting mode) are turned off. support
experience as well as Intelligent Proximity performance. • Check the speaker volume. The volume control on a speaker
• Cisco recommends only one video system with Intelligent itself (not the volume controlled with the remote control or
Proximity enabled in a room. Otherwise, interference is likely Touch 10) affects the ultrasound volume. If the volume is too
to occur, which may lead to problems with device discovery low, the listening devices cannot detect the ultrasound pairing
and session maintenance. messages.
• Some Windows laptops are not able to record sound in the
ultrasound frequency range (20 kHz-22 kHz). This can be due
About privacy to frequency limitations with the sound card, sound driver or
the internal microphone of the particular device. Refer to the
In the Cisco Privacy statement and the Cisco Proximity Support forum for more information.
Supplement you find information about data collection in the
clients and privacy concerns that needs to be considered
when deploying this feature in the organization. Refer to: Audio artifacts
► [Link] • If you can hear audio artifacts, like humming or clipping
noise, decrease the maximum ultrasound volume (Audio >
Ultrasound > MaxVolume).

Cannot share content from a laptop

• For content sharing to work, the video system and the laptop
must be on the same network. For this reason Proximity
sharing might fail if your video system is connected to
your company network via Expressway, and your laptop is
connected via VPN (VPN client dependent).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
43
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio (page 1 of 2)

Video input quality settings Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration.

When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off 1. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > Quality and set the video
between high resolution (sharpness) and high frame rate (motion). quality parameter to Motion.
The Video Input Connector n Quality setting must be set to 2. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Motion for the optimal definition settings to take any effect. With Profile and choose the preferred optimal definition profile.
the video input quality set to Sharpness, the endpoint will transmit
the highest resolution possible, regardless of frame rate. 3. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Threshold60fps to set the threshold below which the
maximum transmitted frame rate will be 30 fps.

Optimal definition profile

The optimal definition profile should reflect the lighting conditions
in the video conferencing room and the quality of the camera
(video input source). The better the lighting conditions and the
better the quality of the camera, the higher the profile should be
used.
Generally, the Medium profile is recommended. However, if the
lighting conditions are very good, we recommend that you test
the endpoint on the various Optimal Definition Profile settings
before deciding on a profile. The High profile may be set in order
to increase the resolution for a given call rate.
Some typical resolutions used for different optimal definition
profiles, call rates and transmit frame rates are shown in the
tables on the next page. The resolution and frame rate must be
supported by both the calling and called systems.

Threshold for sending video at 60 fps

Use the Video Input Connector n OptimalDefinition
Threshold60fps setting to decide when to allow sending video at
60 fps.
For all resolutions lower than this threshold, the maximum
transmitted frame rate will be 30 fps; for higher resolutions, 60 fps
is possible if the available bandwidth is adequate.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
44
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio (page 2 of 2)

Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates

Call rate H.264, maximum 30 fps H.264, 60 fps allowed at 512×288 and higher resolutions
[kbps] Normal Medium High Normal Medium High
128 320×180@30 512×288@20 512×288@30 320×180@30 512×288@20 512×288@30
256 512×288@30 640×360@30 768×448@30 512×288@30 640×360@30 512×288@60
384 640×360@30 768×448@30 768×448@30 640×360@30 512×288@60 640×360@60
576 768×448@30 1024×576@30 1280×720@30 512×288@60 768×448@60 768×448@60
768 1024×576@30 1280×720@30 1280×720@30 640×360@60 768×448@60 1024×576@60
1152 1280×720@30 1280×720@30 1280×720@30 768×448@60 1024×576@60 1280×720@60
1472 1280×720@30 1280×720@30 1920×1080@30 1024×576@60 1024×576@60 1280×720@60
1536 1280×720@30 1280×720@30 1920×1080@30 1024×576@60 1280×720@60 1280×720@60
2176 1280×720@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1280×720@60 1280×720@60 1280×720@60
3232 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1280×720@60 1920×1080@60 1920×1080@60
4736 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@60 1920×1080@60 1920×1080@60
6000 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@60 1920×1080@60 1920×1080@60

Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates

Call rate H.265, maximum 30 fps H.265, 60 fps allowed at 512×288 and higher resolutions
[kbps] Normal Medium High Normal Medium High
128 512×288@30 512×288@30 640×360@30 512×288@30 512×288@30 512×288@60
256 640×360@30 768×448@30 768×448@30 640×360@30 512×288@60 640×360@60
384 768×448@30 1024×576@30 1280×720@30 640×360@60 768×448@60 768×448@60
576 1024×576@30 1280×720@30 1280×720@30 768×448@60 768×448@60 1024×576@60
768 1280×720@30 1280×720@30 1920×1080@30 768×448@60 1024×576@60 1280×720@60
1152 1280×720@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1024×576@60 1280×720@60 1280×720@60
1472 1280×720@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1280×720@60 1280×720@60 1280×720@60
1536 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1280×720@60 1280×720@60 1280×720@60
2176 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1280×720@60 1280×720@60 1280×720@60
3072 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1920×1080@30 1280×720@60 1280×720@60 1920x1080@60** *
The maximum bit rate for H.265 is 3 Mbps. If the bit rate is set higher the
codec uses H.264. In general, H.265 gives similar quality to H.264 at half the
4736*
bandwidth (call rate).
6000* **
H.264

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
45
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface (page 1 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > About Branding
Personalization, and open the Branding tab.
The Branding feature, as describe in
From this page you can add your own branding elements this chapter, allows you to customize
(background brand image, logo, custom message) to the video the screen and Touch user interface
system. appearence without compromising the
overall Cisco user experience.
Branding in the awake state We recommend that you use this feature
In the awake state you can: rather than our legacy Custom wallpaper
feature, which prevents the use of
• Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen and Touch 10)
functionality such as One Button to Push.
• Add a short message (text only) in the bottom left corner (only
on screen, not on Touch 10)
You cannot use the Branding feature
and a Custom wallpaper at the same
time.
If your video system is set up with a
Custom wallpaper, you must click Disable
the custom wallpaper before adding
branding elements.

Custom text

Logo
We recommend:
• A black logo (the video system will add a white overlay with 40% opacity
so that the logo and the other user interface elements go well together)
• PNG-format with transparent background
• Minimum 272×272 pixels (it will be scaled automatically)

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
46
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface (page 2 of 2)

Branding in the halfwake state

In halfwake state you can:
• Add a background brand image (screen and
Touch 10)
• Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen
and Touch 10)
• Customize or remove the message at the center
of the screen (only on screen, not on Touch 10).
This is the message that informs the user how to
start using the video system Background brand image
In general, we recommend that you keep the • When the video system wakes up, the
standard message. Change the message only if image is shown in full color; after a few
you have to adapt it to a different scenario, for seconds the image is automatically dimmed
example if you have a third party user interface. (transparent black overlay)
• Image format: PNG or JPEG
• Recommended size: 1920 × 1080 pixels

Logo
We recommend:
• A white logo (so that it goes well with the dark
background brand image)
• PNG-format with transparent background
• Minimum 272×272 pixels

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
47
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Add a custom wallpaper

Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > About a custom wallpaper
Personalization, and open the Custom wallpaper tab.
If you want a custom picture as
background on your screen, you may
upload and use a custom wallpaper. A
custom wallpaper will not appear on the
Touch controller.
You can only store one custom wallpaper
on the video system at a time; a new
custom wallpaper overwrites the old one.
We recommend that you use our new
Branding feature rather than this legacy
Custom wallpaper feature. You will get a
better overall Cisco user experience, and
avoid loosing functionality such as One
Button To Push and meeting information.
See the ► Add corporate branding to
the screen and Touch 10 user interface
chapter.

You cannot use the Branding feature

and a Custom wallpaper at the same
time.
If your video system is set up with
Upload a custom wallpaper branding elements you must click
Overwrites any old custom wallpaper. Continue without branding before adding
a custom wallpaper.
1. Browse to find the custom wallpaper
image file.
Delete the custom wallpaper
2. Click Upload to save the file on the
Delete fully removes the custom
video system.
wallpaper from the video system.
Supported file formats: BMP, GIF,
JPEG, PNG You have to upload it anew if you
want use it again.
Maximum file size: 16 megapixels
The custom wallpaper is automatically
activated once uploaded.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
48
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume

Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > About ringtones
Personalization, and open the Ringtones tab.
A set of ringtones are installed on the
video system. Use the web interface to
choose a ringtone, and set the ringtone
volume.
You can play back the choosen ringtone
Change the ringtone from the web interface. Note that the
ringtone will be played back on the video
1. Choose a ringtone from the system itself, and not on the computer
drop-down list. running the web interface.

2. Click Save to make it the

active ringtone.

Play back the ringtone

Click the play button ( ► ) to
Set the ringtone volume play back the ringtone.
Use the slide bar to adjust the Use the stop button (  ) to
ringtone volume. end the playback.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
49
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Manage the Favorites list

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Manage Favorites using
Setup > Favorites.
the video system’s user
Import/Export contacts from file interface
Click Export to save the local contacts
in a file; and click Import to bring in Add a contact in the Favorites list
contacts from a file. 1. Select Call on the home screen.
The current local contacts are
2. Select the contact you want to add.
discarded when you import new
contacts from a file. 3. Select Add to favorites.

The contact you add will be placed in the

top folder. You cannot select or create a
Add or edit a contact sub-folder.
1. Click Add contact to make a new
local contact, or click a contact’s Remove a contact from the
name followed by Edit contact.
Favorites list
2. Fill in or update the form that pops
1. Select Call on the home screen.
up.
Choose a folder in the folder drop 2. Select the Favorites tab.
down list in order to store the Add or edit a sub-folder 3. Select the contact you want to
contact in a sub-folder.
1. Click Add folder to make a new sub-folder, or remove.
Click Add contact method and fill in click one of the listed sub-folders followed by
the new input fields if you want to 4. Select Remove favorite.
Edit folder to change an existing sub-folder.
store more than one contact method
for the contact (for example video 2. Fill in or update the form that pops up.
address, telephone and mobile
number). 3. Click Save to create or update the folder.

3. Click Save to store the local contact.

Delete a sub-folder
1. Click a folder’s name followed by Edit folder.
Delete a contact
1. Click a contacts name followed by 2. Click Delete to remove the folder and all its
Edit contact. contacts and sub-folders. Confirm your choice
in the dialog that pops up.
2. Click Delete to remove the local
contact.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
50
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration
Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up accessibility features

Flashing screen for incoming calls
To make it easier for the hearing impaired users to notice when
someone is calling, the screen can be setup to flash red and gray
on incoming calls.
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.

2. Go to UserInterface > Accessibility > IncomingCallNotification

and select AmplifiedVisuals.

3. Click Save.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
51
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Chapter 3

Peripherals

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
52
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect monitors (page 1 of 2)

About video outputs
SX80 has two HDMI video outputs and
one DVI-I output. These outputs can be
used simultaneously.
Typically, the outputs are used for
Connector 3 (DVI-I) monitors or other displays. You can also
connect a recorder.
You can connect up to three monitors to the codec. The codec
Connector 2 (HDMI) Video outputs
distributes the layout on all available monitors.
Connector 1 (HDMI) As default, there is audio on only one of
the HDMI outputs: audio is switched On
Always switch off power when you connect and on Connector 1, and Off on Connector 2.
disconnect monitors and other peripherals.
If you want audio on Connector 2,
refer to the CE Console application
that is introduced in the ► Advanced
customization of audio and GPIO
appendix.
Automatic setup
There is no special configuration needed on the video system in When do you need manual setup
order to support dual monitors or triple monitors scenarios. By
default the number of monitors are auto-detected, and the role You can override the default behavior by setting one or more
of each monitor - whether it is intended to be the first, second, settings manually. You need manual setup when you want to:
or third monitor - is automatically set according to the physical • Dedicate a monitor to only show presentations
connections.
• Use one of the outputs for a recorder
For example, if the total number of monitors are three, the following • Replicate the same layout on more than one monitor
settings will be assumed when set to Auto:
• Show the on-screen messages and indicators (OSD) on
• Video > Monitors: Triple another monitor than the video output with the lowest number
• Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: First • Set the resolution manually, e.g. if the video system fails to
• Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Second detect the native resolution and refresh rate of a monitor
• Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Third

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
53
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect monitors (page 2 of 2)

Manual setup About the number of

The automatic setup works well for common single monitor, monitors and the role of
dual monitors, and triple monitors scenarios. For more complex
scenarios, you may need manual configuration.
each monitor
The Video > Output > Connector n >
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration,
MonitorRole setting assigns a role to the
to find the settings referred below.
monitor that is connected to the output.
The monitor role decide which layout (call
participants and presentation) will appear
Set a role for each Set the number of Choose on which Set the monitor on the monitor.
monitor monitors monitor to display resolution and refresh Monitors with the same monitor role get
Define a role for each monitor Set the number of monitors messages and indicators rate the same layout; monitors with different
with the Video > Output > with different layouts in monitor roles get different layouts.
Define on which monitor to The video system reads the
Connector n > MonitorRole your setup with the Video > display the messages and native resolution of a monitor
setting. Monitors setting. indicators on-screen with the and outputs this if possible.
UserInterface > OSD > Output Typically, this gives the best The Video > Monitors setting must reflect
Choose monitor roles that When set to Auto, the video
setting. possible picture for the the number of different layouts in your
match your monitor setup. system automatically detects
monitor. room setup.
if a monitor is connected to a When set to Auto, the video
connector, and thereby also system determines which If auto-detection of resolution Most often the number of different
determines the number of monitor to use based on the and refresh rate fails, you must layouts are the same as the number
monitors in the setup. number of the connector. set the resolution manually of physical monitors, but not always. If
with the Video > Output > exactly the same layout shall be repeated
The other options allow you
Connector n > Resolution on two or more monitors, the number of
to fix a single, dual, or triple
setting. different layouts is less.
monitor setup; and to dedicate
one monitor for presentations. Note that a monitor can be reserved for
presentations.

Example 1: Example 2:
Three monitors in total, and the third monitor is dedicated to only Two monitors in total, and a recording device is attached to
show presentations: Connector 3 (DVI). OSD on the monitor on Connector 2:
• Video > Monitors: TriplePresentationOnly • Video > Monitors: Auto
• Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: Auto • Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: Auto
• Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Auto • Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Auto
• Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Auto • Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Recorder
• UserInterface > OSD > Output: Auto • UserInterface > OSD > Output: 2

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
54
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect input sources (page 1 of 2)

Audio Line input (Euroblock, 3.5 mm)
About the video inputs
SX80 has three HDMI video inputs, one
DVI-I input, and one combined S-Video/
Composite video input.
Typically, the inputs are used for cameras
Y C and computers. You can also connect
Connector 5 other types of video and content sources.
(S-Video/Composite)
You can connect up to four input
sources to the codec simultaneously
Connector 4 (DVI-I)
Analog video input
(Connector 4 and Connector 5 cannot
be used simultaneously). Connector 5 comprises two BNC
Connector 3 (HDMI) Video inputs
sockets, and is used for S-Video or
Sign in to the web interface and navigate Composite video signals.
to Setup > Configuration, to find the Connector 2 (HDMI)
settings referred below. S-Video: Connect to both the Y and C
Connector 1 (HDMI) connectors.
Composite: Connect to the Y connector.

DVI-I and Analog video input

Connect a camera Connect a computer
The DVI-I and combined S-Video/
The codec supports maximum three cameras. Typically, cameras Connect a computer to a video input in order to share content
Composite video inputs cannot be used
are connected to the HDMI inputs. locally or with conference participants. The codec supports two
simultaneously.
computers simultaneously.
Always use Connector 1 (HDMI) for the main camera.
Typically, computers are connected to Connector 3 (HDMI) or
If you have a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera Connector 4 (DVI-I).
assembly, connect its two cameras to Connector 1 (HDMI) and
Connector 2 (HDMI). To get audio when using DVI-I, you must also connect the
computer to one of the codec’s Audio Line inputs (Euroblock).
Refer to the SX80 installation guide or the camera documentation
how to connect the different cameras to power, Ethernet and/or
camera control.

Note about the DVI-I port and camera control

If you connect a camera to the DVI-I input, the video system
need to know the camera's serial number to be able to control it
(because EDID information is not passed on from the camera to
the video system). Use the following setting:
Cameras > Camera n > AssignedSerialNumber

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
55
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect input sources (page 2 of 2)

Set type and name for an input source

We recommend that you set type and name for an input source:
• Video > Input > Connector n > InputSourceType
• Video > Input > Connector n > Name
These settings determine the names and icons that are shown
on the user interfaces. Intuitive names and icons make source
selection easier.

About video and content quality

Use the Video > Input > Connector n > Quality setting to optimize
quality with respect to motion or sharpness.
Typically, you should choose Motion when a large number of
participants are present or when there is a lot of motion in the
picture. Choose Sharpness when you want the highest quality of
detailed images and graphics.
The default value is Motion for Connector 1, 2 and 5; and
Sharpness for Connector 3 and 4.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
56
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Extend the number of input sources

You can customize our touch user interfaces to include input Architecture
sources that are connected to a third-party external video switch.
You need a Cisco video system with a touch interface, a third-
The sources will appear and behave as any other video source party control system, for example Crestron or AMX, and a third-
that is connected directly to the video system. party video switch. It is the control system, not the video system,
that controls the video switch.
When you program the control system you must use the video
system’s API (events and commands)* in order to connect with the
video switch and the controls on the touch interface. This way you
can synchronize what is shown and done on the user interface
with the actual state of the input sources.

Touch PC
interface 

Video system
Apple TV
API Third-party
video switch

Control
system

Chromecast

User interface with multiple external input sources (example) Other...

Consult the CE Customization guide for full details about how to

extend the user interface, and how to use the video system’s API
to set it up. Go to:
*
You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL,
► [Link] INTEGRATOR, or ADMIN user roles in order to
access the API commands that you need when
programming the control system.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
57
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Information about displays

Real-time communication requirements
We have put in a lot of effort to minimize the camera to screen
delay on our video systems, and also to detect and compensate
for total delay between the audio and video components.
We recommend that you use displays with low delay to increase
the naturalness of communications. We also recommend that you
test a sample before ordering a large number of displays.
Delay through most displays is often very high (>100 ms) and is
therefore detrimental to real-time communication quality.
The following display settings may reduce the delay:
• Activate Game mode, PC mode or similar modes that are
designed to reduce the response time and normally also the
delay
• Deactivate motion smoothing, like Motion Flow, Natural Motion,
or any other video processing that introduces additional delay
• Deactivate advanced audio processing, like Virtual Surround
effects and Dynamic Compression, which will make any
acoustic echo canceller malfunction
• Change to a different HDMI input

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
58
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the SpeakerTrack feature (page 1 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration, Configure speaker tracking Products that support
to find the settings referred.
Use the Cameras > SpeakerTrack settings to configure speaker speaker tracking
tracking.
The following Cisco products support
The speaker track feature uses automatic camera framing to Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Mode speaker tracking:
select the best view based on how many people are in the room.
Auto: Speaker tracking is enabled in general. The system will • MX700 and MX800 with dual camera
When closeup is enabled and a person in the room speaks, the detect people in the room and automatically select the best • SX80 with SpeakerTrack 60 camera
system will find the person and select the best camera framing. camera framing. Users can switch speaker track on or off or Quad camera
The closeup may not include all the persons in the room. If you instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller.
want all the persons in the room to be in the picture at all times • Room Kit
you can turn off the closeup functionality. Off: Speaker tracking is switched off. The speaker track on/off • Room Kit Plus*
button will disappear from the Touch controller. The closeup • Room 55
function and the tracking mode will be disabled.
• Room 70

Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Closeup

This setting only applies when the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode
is set to Auto
Auto: The system will zoom in on the person speaking.
Off: The system will keep all the persons in the room in the
camera framing at all times.

Tracking mode
The tracking mode defines how fast the camera view switch to a
new speaker when the tracking algorithm detects a change.
Use the Cameras > SpeakerTrack > TrackingMode setting to
select between the two modes.
Auto: This is the default setting.
Conservative: The system reacts slower to detected changes,
and the camera view will switch to a new speaker later.

*
Room Kit Plus includes Quad Camera and Codec
Plus

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
59
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the SpeakerTrack feature (page 2 of 2)

Settings that are overidden by the speaker

track functionality
Applies when using a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60
camera.
These settings are changed automatically when speaker tracking
is on:
• Video > Input > Connector n > Quality
These settings are always forced to Motion for the connectors
where the dual cameras are connected. If both settings are
already set to Motion, there is no change.

• Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >

Threshold60fps
These settings will stay untouched if they are already equal
for the connectors where the dual cameras are connected.
If they are not equal the lowest threshold among the two is
preferred.

• Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition > Profile

These settings will stay untouched if they are already equal for
the connectors where the dual cameras are connected. If they
are not equal the preferred setting is the first value in the list,
(Normal, Medium, High) that one of the two settings has.

The settings above are reset to the value they used to have,
as soon as you turn off speaker tracking. This is regardless of
whether you have used the user interface or the Cameras >
SpeakerTrack > Mode setting to turn off speaker tracking.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
60
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 1 of 3)

The Snap to Whiteboard feature extends the speaker Preparations
tracking functionality, thus you need a camera that
supports SpeakerTrack:
• MX700 and MX800 with dual camera Whiteboard position Speaker position
• SX80 with SpeakerTrack 60 camera or Quad camera
• Room Kit Speaker track camera
• Room Kit Plus (Codec Plus and Quad Camera)
Sound
• Room 55 tracking

W
area
• Room 70

Accurate distance (d)

With the Snap to Whiteboard extension, the camera d between camera
captures both the person and the whiteboard when a and whiteboard
person next to the whiteboard is speaking.

W
Whiteboard

The whiteboard must be placed across the room from The Sound tracking area is from half the whiteboard
the camera, as shown in the illustration. and up.
Without the Snap to Whiteboard extension, the camera
When configuring the feature, you need to know Thus, the person presenting on the whiteboard must
captures only the person.
the accurate distance between the camera and the stand upright next to the whiteboard. He or she
whiteboard. cannot move about in the room.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
61
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 2 of 3)

The Snap to Whiteboard wizard is only available when: Troubleshooting
• Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Mode is Auto.
If the camera does not move to the
whiteboard position when the person
who is speaking stands next to the
Define the whiteboard area whiteboard, check the following and redo
the required steps in the wizard:
Use the wizard on the Touch controller to define the whiteboard 4. Follow the instructions in the wizard - use the back button
area. if you want to redo a step, and the next button to move to • Check that the whiteboard is placed
the next step: across the room from the camera.
1. Tap the contact information in the upper left corner of the • Check that the distance between the
• Move the slider to set the distance between the camera
Touch controller and open the Settings menu. camera and whiteboard is measured
and the whiteboard. It is important that the distance is
measured accurately. accurately.
2. Tap Snap to Whiteboard.
• The person who is speaking must be
Sign in with ADMIN credentials if the Settings menu is
close to the whiteboard. Furthermore,
passphrase protected on your video system.
the person must stand upright so that
the sound comes from the upper half
3. Tap Configure or Reconfigure to start the wizard (depends
of the whiteboard area.
whether you configure the feature for the first time or not).
• Adjust the camera view (pan, tilt, zoom) to frame the
whiteboard. Leave some space on both sides for the
person that will be speaking.

• If you have a Speaker Track 60 camera: Fine tune both

cameras (pan, tilt, zoom) to show the same view.

• Stand next to the whiteboard and start speaking.

If the camera zooms to the view that you have chosen for
the whiteboard, the feature is correctly set up, and ready
to use. If not, see the troubleshooting notes to the right.
• Tap to close the wizard, and to close the Settings
panel.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
62
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 3 of 3)

Enable and disable Snap to Whiteboard How to switch on speaker
You can enable or disable the Snap to Whiteboard feature from From the Touch controller tracking
the Settings menu on the Touch controller or from the web
1. Tap the contact information in the upper left corner of the Speaker tracking, which can be switched
interface.
Touch controller and open the Settings menu. on and off by the user at any time,
must be switched on for the Snap to
2. Tap Snap to Whiteboard. Whiteboard extension to work.
If the Settings menu on the Touch controller is open (not
protected by the ADMIN passphrase), any user can switch Sign in with ADMIN credentials if the Settings menu is Tap the camera icon in the status bar of
the feature On and Off during a meeting or between protected by a passphrase on your video system. the Touch controller, and use the toggle
meetings. Moreover, any user can reconfigure the feature. button to switch speaker tracking on and
3. Set the toggle switch to: off.
Enabled: Snap to Whiteboard is enabled, and the
camera will capture both the person that speaks and the
whiteboard he or she is standing next to.
Disabled: Snap to Whiteboard is disabled, and the camera
will capture only the person that speaks.

W W
From the web interface
1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.

Camera view when Snap to Camera view when Snap to 2. Find the Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Whiteboard > Mode
Whiteboard is enabled Whiteboard is disabled setting.
On: Snap to Whiteboard is enabled, and the camera will
capture both the person that speaks and the whiteboard
he or she is standing next to.
Off: Snap to Whiteboard is disabled, and the camera will
capture only the person that speaks.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
63
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the PresenterTrack feature (page 1 of 5)

The PresenterTrack feature enables the camera to follow Plan the room and the stage area Plan the trigger zone
the presenter, while the presenter moves about on stage.
When the presenter leaves the stage the tracking stops. Consider where to place the camera, that is used for The trigger zone is the area where presenter tracking
presenter tracking, to obtain an optimal user experience. is triggered. The trigger zone must cover an area that
A system administrator must define the stage area and enables the detection of a presenter's face.
the trigger zone. We recommend you to be in the room Allow the audience or meeting participants to move
while setting up PresenterTrack. naturally in the room, without being tracked unintended. Choose a location where the presenter naturally will
enter the stage, for example by the speakers podium
The stage area is the zoomed-out overview image. Make or presenters desk. The trigger zone is not visible for
it large enough so the presenter can move about on stage. the person coming up on stage, so make it easy for the
Prerequisites When the presenter leaves the stage area the tracking stops. person to be detected.
The PresenterTrack is supported with: To avoid false face detection, make sure the background
• MX700 or MX800 with single or dual camera, of the trigger zone is neutral. Avoid having the trigger zone
• SX80 with Precision 60 camera, or in front of a monitor.

• SX80 with SpeakerTrack 60 camera

PrestenterTrack feature Stage area Trigger zone

• Supports only one person in the cropped image.
• Can be used in combination with Briefing Room
mode.
• You can use one of the SpeakerTrack 60 cameras for
PresenterTrack.
• The camera uses digital pan, tilt and zoom, so it will
not move physically.
• PresenterTrack and SpeakerTrack cannot be used
simultaneously. When you activate PresenterTrack,
SpeakerTrack is disabled, and vice versa.
The exception is when using the Briefing Room set-
up – both are active simultaneously in Q&A mode
(when someone in the local audience asks a question,
while the system is in Local Presenter mode).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
64
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the PresenterTrack feature (page 2 of 5)

Step 1: Position the camera Tip

• We recommend that you are in
the room when you configure the
Sign in to the web interface: PresenterTrack feature.
1. Navigate to Setup > Presenter Tracking. • Use the Touch controller to adjust the
camera (zoom, pan, tilt) to define the
2. Check the Enable PresenterTrack check box. stage area.
3. Click Configure... to open the configuration page. • Use the video system's web interface
to define the trigger zone. At the
When you click the Configure... button on the video
same time, watch the screen of the
system's web interface, this will happen:
video system to see the result.
• Standby is deactivated. • Activate the PresenterTrack feature
• Full screen self-view is enabled. from the camera panel on the Touch
• The trigger zone rectangle is shown on screen. controller.
• If already active, the PresenterTrack feature is
deactivated.

Stage area: The zoomed out overview

Note that if you leave this web page at this stage, image. Make it large enough so that
without doing any changes, the trigger zone rectangle the presenter can move around. When
is still visible on the video system's screen. the presenter leaves the stage area
the tracking stops.
• If you are not in the room: Click the Save button to
remove the trigger zone rectangle on the screen.
• If you are in the room: Tap the Camera icon on the
Touch controller and choose a camera position
from the list.

4. Choose a camera from the Camera source drop down list.

A Precision 60 or SpeakerTrack 60 camera is required to
enable the PresenterTrack feature. If the camera does not
meet the requirements you will see a notification.

5. Define the stage area. Use the Touch controller to adjust

the full screen self-view (zoom, pan, tilt) if necessary.
The camera must cover the stage area that is used by
a presenter. When the presenter leaves the stage the
camera will stop following the presenter.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
65
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the PresenterTrack feature (page 3 of 5)

Step 2: Set the trigger zone

The trigger zone defines the area where presenter tracking is
triggered.
You cannot see the video from the room in the web interface.
An empty gray area represents the camera view and a dashed Trigger zone
rectangle represents the trigger zone. Watch the video
system screen to see the video from the room, together with
the same dashed rectangle as you see in the web interface.
• Adjust the size and location of the trigger zone to cover a
suitable area to detect a presenter's face. The change you
do on the video system's web interface is reflected on the
video system screen.
• The trigger zone must be large enough to detect a
presenter face. Have in mind that people are of different
heights.
Video system screen: See the video from the room when you set the trigger zone.
Click Save.

Stage area
The zoomed out overview image of the
room is represented by a blank box in
the video system's web interface.

Trigger zone
The dashed rectangle can be moved
around and re-sized. You can see the
same rectangle on the endpoint screen
when you define the trigger zone.

Web interface: Set the trigger zone.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
66
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the PresenterTrack feature (page 4 of 5)

Step 3: Test PresenterTrack in action User scenarios

Activate PresenterTrack. We do not support tracking of more than
one person, but sometimes more than
1. Tap the Camera icon in the upper right corner of the Touch one person is in the cropped image.
controller.
When multiple faces are in the cropped
2. Select Presenter from the list of camera positions to activate image, the faces will be tracked as long
presenter tracking. as they all move in the same direction.
If they move in different directions the
3. The camera is now ready for presenter tracking, and you can tracking stops and the image zooms out
test the feature: and show the stage area. To start the
a. Position yourself in the trigger zone. presenter tracking again, the presenter
a. Position yourself in the trigger zone. must go to the trigger zone to be
b. When you are detected the camera zooms in on you.
Walk back and forth on stage and check that the camera detected.
follows you. Scenario 1: A person is interviewed by
c. Leave the stage area to stop presenter tracking. another. They are both followed by the
camera as long as they stand still or move
If necessary, go back to Step 1 or Step 2 to adjust the size of the
in the same direction.
stage area or the trigger zone.
Scenario 2: When a presenter is replaced
by another the tracking stops. The new
presenter must move into the trigger zone
to be detected by the camera.
If you need to disable, and thereafter
enable, presenter tracking in a controlled
b. The camera zooms in on the presenter. manner this can be done on the Touch
controller.
1. Tap the Camera icon in the status bar.

2. Deselect Presenter from the list

of camera positions to disable
PresenterTrack, and select Presenter
again to enable the feature.

c. Leave the stage to stop presenter tracking.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
67
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Set up the PresenterTrack feature (page 5 of 5)

Diagnostics mode
In order to troubleshoot you can set the video system in
PresenterTrack diagnostics mode. The green square The blue square indicates
indicates the at face is the at face is detected but
• Sign in to the xAPI and run the following command. tracked. not tracked.
xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack Set Mode: Diagnostic
In diagnostics mode the video system screen shows the stage
area (the zoomed out overview image), and the indicators:

RED: The trigger zone. The red rectangle is

the trigger zone.

YELLOW: The cropped image that shows a zoomed in view of

the presenter.

GREEN: A face is detected and it is tracked.

GREEN BLINKING, FILLED: Indicates a positive face detection.

If the tracked individual does not get a valid face-read the
square will become red.

RED BLINKING, FILLED: Indicates a false face detection. After

some seconds the tracking will stop.

BLUE: A face is detected but the face is not tracked.

The yellow rectangle is the cropped

image that follows the presenter. The
yellow rectangle is not visible until a
person steps into the trigger zone and is
being tracked.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
68
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Briefing room set-up (page 1 of 6)

The briefing room set-up is designed to provide easy set up,
management and use of a room for education, training or similar.
The set-up is tailored around the following room modes:
• Local Presenter (the presenter is in the room)
• Remote Presenter (the presenter is calling in)
• Discussions (for discussions between different sites with a
local presenter in the room) Audience Presenter
camera camera
The briefing room is available as a room type template, which
means that the required configurations are pushed automatically
to the video system when you select the template.
In order for these configurations to match the room, it is important
that the room is set up correctly, and that cameras and displays
are connected exactly as specified in this chapter.
Presentation Remote Remote
display presenter audience
display display
Products supporting Briefing room
Codecs:
• SX80
Integrated video systems:
• MX700
• MX800 Single
• MX800 Dual

Required equipment
Briefing room set-up *

• Three displays (Presentation display, Remote presenter

display, and Remote audience display)
• Two cameras (Audience camera and Presenter camera)
• Microphones
• Speakers
• Touch 10 user interface.

*
The illustration shows a codec with Speaker Track 60 camera as audience camera. The same principle applies also to
the supported integrated systems, and other supported codec and camera combinations.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
69
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Briefing room set-up (page 2 of 6)

Room modes
The set-up is tailored around the following pre-defined room modes*:

Local Presenter mode Remote Presenter mode Discussion mode

The presenter is in the room. The presenter is calling in. For discussions between different sites with a local
presenter in the room.
The local presenter mode also covers the case when
someone in the local audience asks a question (Q&A).

Local Presenter mode Remote Presenter mode Discussion mode

Video sent to the far end Sends video from the Presenter camera Sends video from the Audience camera Sends video from the Audience camera
Q&A: Sends split-screen video from the Presenter
camera and the person asking the question
(Audience camera)

Remote presenter display Shows the presentation Shows the presenter that is calling in, and other Shows the remote sites that are part of the
remote sites (you can decide the layout locally) discussion (you can decide the layout locally)

Presentation display Shows the presentation Shows the presentation Shows the presentation

Remote audience display Shows the remote participants that are calling in Shows the presentation Shows the presentation
from different sites

If there is no presentation, nothing will be shown on the corresponding screens (gray).

*
The illustrations show a codec with Speaker Track 60 camera as audience camera. The same principle
applies also to the supported integrated systems, and other supported codec and camera combinations.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
70
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Briefing room set-up (page 3 of 6)

Briefing room blue prints

Remote Remote
Presentation presenter presenter Presentation
Remote
Presentation presenter display display display display
display display
Audience camera Audience camera
Audience camera (single or dual) (single or dual)

Remote audience display

Remote audience display
Presenter camera
Presenter camera

Microphones
Microphones Microphones

Presenter camera
Remote audience display

SX80 MX800 Single (MX800S) MX700 and MX800 Dual (MX800D)

Recommendation
• Remote presenter display: 1st screen, placed at front. • Audience camera: The integrated camera for systems • Microphones: Cisco TelePresence Ceiling Microphone
For integrated systems, this is its (right) screen. that have that, or a Cisco Quad Camera or Cisco for good coverage of the room. Other microphone
• Presentation display: 2nd screen, placed at front. For TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera assembly. solutions can also be used.
integrated systems with two screens, this is its left It is also possible to use a camera without speaker • Speakers: The integrated speakers for systems that
screen. tracking capabilities. have that, or good quality stereo speakers placed next
• Remote audience display: 3rd screen, placed further • Presenter camera: Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 to the Presentation display and the Remote presenter
back. with presenter tracking enabled. display.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
71
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Briefing room set-up (page 4 of 6)

Remote
Presentation presenter

Connect cables display display

Audience camera
It is very important to connect the cameras and monitors to the video system as illustrated; otherwise the configuration
that is pushed to the video system when selecting the Briefing room type template will not match your actual set-up.
Remote audience display
Presenter camera

Microphones

Network Microphones, Loudspeakers,

(LAN) max 8 Computer mono or stereo
Network Microphones,
(LAN) max 8 Computer

Ethernet switch (w/PoE) 3

Audience camera 1
Remote
Ethernet switch (w/PoE) 3

audience
Audience camera 1 display
Presenter camera

Presenter camera Presentation display Power

Camera connection with Cisco TelePresence

SpeakerTrack 60 as audience camera
Touch 10 2
Remote presenter display

1
If the Audience camera is a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera, you should use camera input 1 and 2 for the Audience camera and camera input 3 for the Presenter camera.
2
If the Ethernet switch does not provide Power over Ethernet (PoE), you need a mid-span PoE injector for Touch 10. Refer to the ► Connect the Touch 10 controller chapter for more information.
3
The Ethernet switch may be connected to either Network port 2 as illustrated, or to Network port 3. It cannot be connected to Network port 1, which is reserved for the LAN connection.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
72
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Briefing room set-up (page 5 of 6)

Configure the video system Change room mode while in a conference

1. It is important that the Presenter camera is not being Switching between room modes (Local Presenter, Remote Presenter, Discussions), which implies that camera input sources,
shared. Use the Touch interface to stop sharing the and remote and local screen layouts, are changed, can be done in two ways:
video from the Presenter camera.
• Automatically, based on who is speaking and whether a local presenter are present on stage.
2. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > • Manually, using the buttons on the Touch user interface.
Configurations.

3. Go to the Video > Input > Connector 3 section, and set Choose between automatic or manual switching between room modes
the following:
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Configuration.
• InputSourceType: camera
2. Use the Cameras > PresenterTrack > PresenterDetectedStatus setting to determine whether to enable (default) or
• PresentationSelection: Manual
disable automatic switching between Local Presenter and Remote Presenter modes. The room mode will not change
• Quality: Motion automatically if the current mode is Discussions.
• Visibility: Never
• CameraControl Mode: On Switch room modes automatically Switch to another room mode manually
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
Only supported with Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 While in a conference, you can switch to another mode
as Presenter camera, and the PresenterTrack feature using the Touch controller.
4. Set up PresenterTrack for the Presenter camera, see
enabled (Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled set to True).
the ►Set up the PresenterTrack feature chapter. 1. Tap Briefing Room on the Touch controller.
Automatic switching implies:
5. Navigate to Setup > Room Types in the web interface. 2. Tap the mode you want to change to.
• The system switches to Local Presenter mode when a
6. Click the Briefing thumbnail to push the corresponding person is detected in the PresenterTrack trigger zone.
configuration to the video system. • The system switches to Remote Presenter mode
Note that the cameras and displays must be connected when the local presenter, who is tracked, leaves the
as described in the ►Connect cables chapter. stage.
• If someone in the local audience asks a question,
while the system is in Local Presenter mode, the
system sends split-screen video of both the presenter
and the person asking the question. This requires
Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 or Cisco Webex
Quad Camera as Audience camera, and that speaker
tracking is switched on.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
73
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Briefing room set-up (page 6 of 6)

Limitations
These features are not supported when using Briefing Room:
• MultiSite (embedded multipoint switch)
• H.265 video encoding
• Content sharing to Proximity clients
• Directional audio
• Snap to Whiteboard
• Active control (selection of layouts from CMS)

If you want to use both the Briefing room and In-room

control features, carefully read about the current
limitations in the Software Release Notes before you start
the configuration.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
74
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Using extra loudspeakers and local reinforcement

When using the video system with local reinforcement, extra Configuration example
loudspeakers are strongly recommended to ensure that people in
the room get a good auditory experience. The configuration example describes a setup with the main loudspeakers on
Line Output 1 and 2, the extra loudspeakers on Line Output 3 and 4, and local
presenters’ microphones on Microphone Input 1 and 2.
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration, to find the
settings referred below.
SX80
1. Set the delay (ms) for the extra loudspeakers:
Audio from Far End (including any Far End PC-input audio)
Audio > Output > Line 3 > Delay > DelayMs : <0..290>
Master Audio > Output > Line 4 > Delay > DelayMs : <0..290>
Volume Gain
The delay can vary based on where in the room the loudspeakers are
placed. To calculate the delay, see the Using Extra Loudspeakers and Local
PC-input audio & Far
End audio sent to main Reinforcement guide.

PC-input audio
loudspeakers

2. Switch on reinforcement for the microphones that the local presenters will
Audio to Far End
use:
Microphones Microphone
for local reinforcement
PC-input audio
presenter gain
Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Input > Microphone 1 Mode : On
Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Input > Microphone 2 Mode : On

Gain 3. Switch on reinforcement for the extra loudspeakers:

Local
Delay presenter, Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Output > Line 3 > Mode : On
Adaptive
echo
PC-input Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Output > Line 4 > Mode : On
audio and
cancelers
Gain Far End
audio sent 4. Set the amplification of the microphone signal from the local presenters to
to extra
loudspeakers the extra loudspeakers:
PC-input audio Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Gain : <-54..15>
Adjust the gain in small steps and make sure that the final setting is well
below the feeding level.

Additional resources
We recommend reading the Using Extra Loudspeakers and Local
Reinforcement guide for a comprehensive description and best practices for
the solution.
►[Link]
audio/[Link]

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
75
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect the Touch 10 controller (page 1 of 4)

Touch 10 must either be directly connected to the video About the SX80 network ports
system as described on this page, or paired to the video
system via the network (LAN) as described on the next SX80 has three network ports. Network port 1 is reserved for the connection to LAN, while Network ports 2 and 3
page. The latter is referred to as remote pairing. should be used for peripherals like cameras and Touch 10.
If you have more than two peripheral units requiring an Ethernet connection, you can insert an Ethernet switch
between Network port 2 or 3 and the peripherals.
Connect Touch 10 directly to the video
system
Connect Touch 10 to the video system’s 2nd or 3rd
Ethernet port as illustrated.
Note that the video system does not provide Power over
Ethernet (PoE), so you need a mid-span PoE injector to
power Touch 10.

Touch 10 set-up
Once Touch 10 is connected to power, the set-up Standard Ethernet cable
procedure begins. Follow the instructions on screen.
If Touch 10 needs software upgrade, new software will be SWITCH
PoE
downloaded from the video system and installed on the
injector
unit automatically as part of the set-up procedure. Touch AP
10 restarts after the upgrade. Power PoE rated Ethernet cable
• 100-240 VAC
• 50/60 Hz

Contact information
The video system’s name or
address is displayed in the status
bar when Touch 10 is successfully
connected to the video system.

The Ethernet connector

is at the rear of Touch 10.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
76
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect the Touch 10 controller (page 2 of 4)

Connect Touch 10 to the video system via the Standard Ethernet cable
network (LAN)
Connect Touch 10 and the video system to network wall sockets or Network
to a network switch as illustrated. (LAN)

Touch 10 set-up
Once Touch 10 is connected to power, the set-up procedure begins.
Follow the instructions on screen.
When the Select a room system screen appears, note the following:
• A list of video systems signalling that they are available for paring
will show up on the screen. Tap the name of the video system
you want to pair with.
Note that the following must be fulfilled for a video system to
show up in the list:
• The video system and Touch 10 must be on the same subnet. Standard Ethernet cable
• The video system must have been restarted within the last 10
minutes. If the video system does not appear in the list, try
restarting it. SWITCH
Network
PoE (LAN)1
• If the video system does not appear in the list of available
injector
systems, enter its IP address or hostname in the input field. Tap AP
Connect. PoE rated Ethernet cable
Power
• You have to log in with username and passphrase for the paring
• 100-240 VAC
process to commence. Tap Login.
• 50/60 Hz
A user with the USER role is sufficient; you do not need the
ADMIN role to perform this task.
Read more about how to create a user account and assign a role Contact information
to it in the ► User administration chapter.
The video system’s name or 1
If the network infrastructure provides
If Touch 10 needs software upgrade, new software will be address is displayed in the
Power over Ethernet (PoE), you do not
downloaded from the video system and installed on the unit status bar when Touch 10 need a PoE injector; Touch 10 should
automatically as part of the set-up procedure. Touch 10 restarts after is successfully paired to the be connected directly to the wall socket
the upgrade. video system. (Ethernet switch) with a PoE rated
Ethernet cable.

For safety, the PoE source must be in
the same building as Touch 10. The PoE
The Ethernet connector rated Ethernet cable can be up to 100 m
is at the rear of Touch 10. (330 ft).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
77
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect the Touch 10 controller (page 3 of 4)

Cisco TelePresence Touch 10 physical interface

See next page for a newer version of the Touch 10 controller.

Touch screen

Adjustable support Micro-USB:

to accommodate for maintenance only
individual ergonomic
needs
Two USB connectors
(not in use)

Ethernet with PoE:

for power and Ethernet
Sound bar for audio
adjustment

Mini-jack, 3.5 mm
Audio mute Not in use
(not in use)

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
78
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect the Touch 10 controller (page 4 of 4)

Cisco Touch 10 physical interface

This is the new version of the Touch 10 controller launched late 2017. It has the same functionality
as the previous version, but has a slightly different physical interface. The new device is identified
by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back.

Touch screen

Adjustable support Factory reset

to accommodate (behind cover)
individual ergonomic
needs
Micro-USB:
for maintenance only
(behind cover)

Ethernet with PoE:

for power and Ethernet
Sound bar for audio
adjustment

Audio mute

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
79
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Connect the ISDN Link

The ISDN Link enables a video system to use ISDN lines for Setup with LAN and direct connection between the video system and ISDN Link
connectivity, and enables both video calls and telephone calls
over the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). This is the recommended setup. But there are other options, so see the user documentation for
additional examples: ► [Link]
ISDN Link support ISDN BRI, ISDN PRI and V.35. ISDN can be
used in addition to regular IP connectivity for SIP or H.323 calls,
or without any IP infrastructure.
ISDN Link is managed from the video systems web interface. Sign
in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Peripherals.

Requirements:
• The ISDN Link must be running IL1.1.7 software or later LAN
• The video system (codec) must be running CE9.3 software or
later. The ISDN Link must be re-paired with the video system PC/Laptop for system
after the video system has been converted from TC software management
to CE software. Video system
• The video endpoint must have IPv6 enabled in the web (represented by
interface or API in order to communicate with the ISDN Link an SX80 codec)

• Observe the network topology in the ISDN Link Installation

Guide in order to guarantee a successful installation
ISDN Link,
• The video system and ISDN Link must be on the same subnet. rear panel
If the endpoint or ISDN Link are assigned new IP addresses
they will only remain paired as long as they are kept in the
same subnet.

Limitations:
• Video systems that are registered to the Cisco Webex cloud
service are not able to use ISDN Link.

BRI PRI NET LAN Video Power

Setup and configuration 1-4 port system
When converting the video system from TC (TC6 or later) to port
CE software (CE9.3 or later) the ISDN Link will automatically be
unpaired due to security reasons.
More information about ISDN Link (Release Notes, Installation
Guide, Administrator Guide, API Guide, Compliance and Safety
guide) is found here: ► [Link]

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
80
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Chapter 4

Maintenance

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
81
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Upgrade the system software (page 1 of 2)

Upgrading from TC to CE software Upgrading from CE8 to CE9

CE software is the evolution of TC software. We recommend The MultiStream feature with Cisco TelePresence Server is
that you upgrade to TC7.3.6 or later before you upgrade to CE deprecated in CE9.
software.
Also, some features that were available from the Touch controller
It is important that you read about upgrade requirements and in CE8, are not available in the first CE9 releases. Read the
functionality changes before you upgrade to CE software. Software Release Notes for details before you upgrade.
Also check that your environment supports the changes. We
recommend reading the Software Release Notes carefully.
If you don’t take into account these considerations, upgrading to
CE can leave you with a non-functioning deployment that requires
you to downgrade. Install CE9?

No Is your video TC Which software

Upgrade to TC7.3.6 or later system running version is the video
TC7.3.6 or later? system running?

Yes CE

Do you need TC Do you need

Yes Yes
Use TC7.x software features that are MultiStream with Use CE8.x software
not supported in CE Cisco TelePresence
software?* Server?

No

*
CE software does not support the
No
following features and products: Are you currently
Update your application Yes
-- MultiWay conferencing to the new API commands using the API (for
-- CTMS conferencing before installing CE9 example Crestron or
-- MediaNet AMX)?
-- Displays that do not support 16:9
or 16:10 resolution No
-- Custom video layouts using TC
Install CE9
Console. CE Console is for audio
and GPIO only

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
82
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Upgrade the system software (page 2 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > About software versions
Software Upgrade.
This video conference system is using CE
software. The version described in this
document is CE9.4.x.

Download new software Software release notes

For software download, go to the Cisco Download For a complete overview of the news and changes, we
Software web page, and navigate to your product: recommend reading the Software Release Notes (CE9).
► [Link]
Go to: ► [Link]
Each software version has a unique file name. The format of collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/tsd-
the file name is “s52020ce9_4_x.pkg”. [Link]

Install new software

Download the appropriate software package and store it on your
computer. This is a .pkg file. Don’t change the file name.
1. Click Browse... and find the .pkg file that contains the new
software.
The software version will be detected and shown.

2. Click Install software to start the installation process.

Check new software version

The complete installation normally take no longer than 15 minutes.
You can follow the progress on the web page. The video system When you have selected a file, the
restarts automatically after the installation. software version is shown here

You must sign in anew in order to continue working with the web
interface after the restart.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
83
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Add option keys

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > About option keys
Option Keys.
Your video system may or may not have
You see a list of all option keys, also the ones that are not one or more software options installed. In
installed on your video system. order to activate the optional functionality
Contact your Cisco representative for information about how to the corresponding option key must be
get option keys for the uninstalled options. present on the video system.
Each video system has unique option
keys.
Option keys are not deleted when
performing a software upgrade or factory
reset, so they need to be added only
once.
The video system’s serial number
You need the video system’s serial number
when ordering an option key.

Add an option key

1. Enter an Option Key in the text input field.

2. Click Add option key.

If you want to add more than one option key,
repeat these steps for all keys.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
84
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

System status
System information overview Detailed system status
Sign in to the web interface to see the System Information page. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Status in
order to find more detailed status information*.
This page shows the product type, system name and basic
information about the hardware, software, installed options and
network address. Registration status for the video networks (SIP Search for a status entry
and H.323) is included, as well as the number/URI to use when
making a call to the system. Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All entries that
contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Entries that have
these letters in their value space are also shown.

Select a category and navigate to the correct status

The system status is grouped in categories. Choose a category in
the left pane to show the related status to the right.

*
The status shown in the illustration serve as an example. The status of your
system may be different.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
85
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Run diagnostics
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > Run diagnostics
Diagnostics.
Click Re-run diagnostics to ensure that
the list is up to date.
The diagnostics page lists the status for some common
sources of errors*.
Leave standby mode
Errors and critical issues are clearly marked in red color;
warnings are yellow. Click Deactivate standby to wake up a
video system that is in standby mode.

*
The messages shown in the illustration serve as examples. Your system
may show other information.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
86
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Download log files

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to About log files
Maintenance > System Logs.
The log files are Cisco specific debug
files which may be requested by the
Cisco support organization if you need
technical support.
Download all log files Start extended logging The current log files are time stamped
event log files.
Click Download logs archive... Click Start extended logging....
and follow the instructions. All current log files are archived in a time
Extended logging lasts for stamped historical log file each time the
An anonymized call history 3 or 10 minutes, depending video system restarts. If the maximum
is included in the log files by on whether full capture of number of historical log files is reached,
default. network traffic is included or the oldest one will be overwritten.
not.
Use the drop down list if
you want to exclude the call Click Stop extended logging if
history from the log files, or you want to stop the extended
Extended logging mode
if you want to include the full logging before it times out. Extended logging mode may be switched
call history (non-anonymous on to help diagnose network issues and
caller/callee). As default, the network traffic
problems during call setup. While in this
is not captured. Use the drop
mode more information is stored in the
down menu if you want to
log files.
Open/save one log file include partial or full capture of
network traffic. Extended logging uses more of the video
Click the file name to open the system’s resources, and may cause the
log file in the web browser; video system to under-perform. Only use
right click to save the file on extended logging mode when you are
the computer. troubleshooting an issue.

Refresh a log file list

Click the refresh button for
Current logs or Historical logs
to update the corresponding
lists.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
87
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Create a remote support user

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Maintenance > System About the remote support
Recovery and select the Remote Support User tab.
user
In cases where you need to diagnose
The remote support user should only be enabled for problems on the video system you can
troubleshooting reasons when instructed by Cisco TAC. create a remote support user.
The remote support user is granted read
access to the system and has access to
a limited set of commands that can aid
troubleshooting.
You will need assistance from Cisco
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to
acquire the password for the remote
support user.

Create remote support user

1. Click Create user.

2. Open a case with Cisco TAC.

3. Copy the text in the Token field and send

it to Cisco TAC.

4. Cisco TAC will generate a password.

The remote support user is valid for seven
days, or until it is deleted.

Delete remote support user

Click Delete user.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
88
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Backup and restore configurations and custom elements

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > Create a backup file Additional information
Backup and Restore.
1. Open the Create backup tab.
Restoring macros
2. Select the elements you want to include in the backup file.
You can include custom elements as well as configurations in a
If a backup file that contains macros is
backup file (zip-format). You can choose which of the following Elements that currently don’t exist on the video system are
restored on a video system the following
elements to include in the bundle: greyed out.
applies:
• Branding images 3. Select which settings - if any - you want to include in the • The macro runtime is started or
• Macros backup file. Note the following: restarted.
• Favorites • As default, all settings are included in the backup file. • The macros are automatically
• Sign-in banner • You can remove one or more settings manually by activated (started).
• In-room control panels deleting them from the list on the web page.
• Configurations/settings (all or a sub-set) • If you want to remove all settings that are specific Restoring branding images
to one video system, click Remove system-specific
The backup file can either be restored manually from the video configurations. If a backup bundle contains branding
system’s web interface, or you can generalize the backup bundle images, the UserInterface Wallpaper
so that it can be provisioned across multiple video systems, for This is useful if you are going to restore the backup bundle setting is automatically set to Auto.
example using Cisco UCM or TMS (see the next chapters). on other video systems.
This means that the branding images
4. Click Download backup to store the elements in a zip-file on will automatically be displayed, possibly
your computer. replacing a custom wallpaper.

The backup file

Restore a backup file
The backup file is a zip-file that contains
1. Choose the Restore backup tab. several files. It is important that the files
are at the top level within the zip-file, and
2. Click Browse... and find the backup file you want to restore.
not include in a folder.
All settings and elements in the backup file will be applied.

3. Click Upload file to apply the backup.

Some settings may require that you restart the video system
before they take effect.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
89
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

CUCM provisioning of custom elements

A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore Upload a customization template to the TFTP file SHA512 checksum
configurations and custom elements chapter, can be used as a server
customization template for multiple video systems. Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum
1. Sign in to Cisco Unified OS Administration. of a file by restoring it to a video system
using its web interface.
2. Navigate to Software Upgrades > TFTP File Management.
The customization template (backup file) may be hosted on either: 1. Sign in to the web interface and
• the CUCM TFTP file service, or 3. Click Upload File. Enter the name and path of the navigate to Maintenance > Backup
customization template in the input field. and Restore.
• a custom web server that can be reached by the video
systems on HTTP or HTTPS. 4. Click Upload File. 2. Choose the Restore backup tab.

3. Click Browse... and find the file you

When a video system get information from CUCM (Cisco Unified Add customization provisioning information for each want to calculate the checksum for.
Communications Manager) about the name and location of a video system Then you can see the SHA512
customization template, the video system will contact the server,
1. Sign in to Cisco Unified CM Administration. checksum at the bottom of the page.
download the file, and restore the custom elements.
Configurations will not be restored on the video system, 2. Navigate to Device > Phone.
even if they are part of the backup file that you use as a
customization template.
3. Fill in the Customization Provisioning fields in the product CUCM documentation
specific configuration section of the relevant devices:
► [Link]
• Customization File: The customization template file name support/unified-communications/unified-
(for example: [Link]) * communications-manager-callmanager/
• Customization Hash Type: SHA512 [Link]
• Cutomization Hash: The SHA512 checksum for the
customization template.
If these fields are not present, you must install a newer Device
Package on CUCM.

4. Click Save and Apply Config to push the configuration to the

video systems.

*
If not using the TFTP Service, you must enter the complete URI for the
customization template: <hostname>:<portnumber>/<path-and-filename>

For example:
• [Link] or
• [Link]

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
90
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

TMS provisioning of custom elements

A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore Create and apply a configuration template SHA512 checksum
configurations and custom elements chapter, can be used as a
customization template for multiple video systems. 1. Create a configurations template. Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum
of a file by restoring it to a video system
The backup file must be hosted on a custom web server that can 2. Add a custom command containing the following XML string in
using its web interface.
be reached by the video systems on HTTP or HTTPS. the configuration template:
1. Sign in to the web interface and
When a video system get information from TMS (TelePresence <Command>
navigate to Maintenance > Backup
Management Suite) about the name and location of the backup <Provisioning>
and Restore.
file, the video system will contact the server, download the file, <Service>
and restore the custom elements. <Fetch> 2. Choose the Restore backup tab.
<URL>web-server-address</URL>
<Checksum>checksum</Checksum> 3. Click Browse... and find the file you
<Origin>origin</Origin> want to calculate the checksum for.
</Fetch> Then you can see the SHA512
</Service> checksum at the bottom of the page.
</Provisioning>
</Command>
where
web-server-address: The URI to the backup file (for
example, [Link]
checksum: The SHA512 checksum of the backup file.
origin: Provisioning *
3. Select the video systems you want to push the configuration
template to, and click Set on systems.

Read the ► Cisco TMS administrator guide for details how

to create TMS configurations templates and make custom
commands.

*
If not setting this parameter to Provisioning, also configurations that are part of
the backup file will be pushed to the video system. If the backup file contains
configurations that are specific to one video system, for example static IP
addresses, system name, and contact information, you may and up with video
systems that you cannot reach.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
91
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Revert to the previously used software image

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > We recommend you to back up the log files, configurations, and About the previously used
System Recovery. custom elements of the video system before you swap to the
previously used software image. software image
If there is a severe problem with the video
Back up log files, configurations and custom elements system, switching to the previously used
software image may help solving the
1. Select the Backup tab. problem.
2. Click Download logs and follow the instructions to save the log If the system has not been factory reset
files on your computer. since the last software upgrade, the
previously used software image still
3. Click Download backup and follow the instructions to save the resides on the system. You do not have to
backup bundle on your computer. download the software again.

Revert to the previously used software image

Only administrators, or when in contact with Cisco technical
support, should perform this procedure.
1. Select the Software Recovery Swap tab.

2. Click Switch to software: cex.y.z..., where x.y.z indicates the

software version.

3. Click Yes to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have

changed your mind.
Wait while the system resets. The system restarts automatically
when finished. This procedure may take a few minutes.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
92
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Factory reset the video system (page 1 of 3)

If there is a severe problem with the video system, the last resort A factory reset implies:
may be to reset it to its default factory settings.
• Call logs are deleted.
It is not possible to undo a factory reset. • Passphrases are reset to default.
• All system parameters are reset to default values.
• All files that have been uploaded to the system are deleted.
Always consider reverting to the previously used software
This includes, but is not limited to, custom wallpaper,
image before performing a factory reset. In many situations this
certificates, and favorites lists.
will recover the system. Read about software swapping in the
► Revert to the previously used software image chapter. • The previous (inactive) software image is deleted.
• Option keys are not affected.
The video system restarts automatically after the factory reset. It
We recommend that you use the web interface or user interface is using the same software image as before.
to factory reset the video system. If these interfaces are not
available, use the shutdown button.
We recommend that you back up the log files, configurations,
and custom elements of the video system before you perform a
factory reset; otherwise these data will be lost.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
93
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Factory reset the video system (page 2 of 3)

Factory reset using the web interface Factory reset from the user interface Back up log files,
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of configurations, and custom
the video system before you continue with the factory reset. the video system before you continue with the factory reset. elements
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > 1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the Sign in to the web interface and navigate
System Recovery. user interface. to Maintenance > System Recovery.
1. Select the Factory Reset tab, and read the provided 2. Select Settings.
information carefully.
3. Select Factory reset. Back up log files, configurations,
2. Click Perform a factory reset.... and custom element
4. Select Reset to confirm your choice, or Back if you have
3. Click Yes to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have changed your mind. 1. Select the Backup tab.
changed your mind.
5. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory 2. Click Download logs and follow the
4. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory settings. When finished, the video system restarts instructions to save the log files on
settings. When finished, the video system restarts automatically. This may take a few minutes. your computer.
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory 3. Click Download backup and follow
When the system has been successfully reset to factory settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen. the instructions to save the backup
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen. bundle on your computer.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
94
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Factory reset the video system (page 3 of 3)

Factory reset using the shutdown button
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of
the video system before you continue with the factory reset.
1. Press and hold the shutdown button until the LEDs go out
(approximately 5 sec) and the system shuts down.

2. Press and hold the shutdown button until the power LED
starts blinking (approximately 10 seconds). Then release the
button.

3. Within four seconds after the LED starts blinking, press the Shutdown
shutdown button twice to engage the factory reset. button
4. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory
settings. When finished, the video system restarts
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.

If you failed to press the shutdown button twice within

the four seconds, the system will not revert to the default
factory settings, and you will not see the confirmation
message. If this happens, go back to step 1 and try again.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
95
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Factory reset Cisco Touch 10

This chapter applies to the new Touch 10 controller that was
1. Open the small cover at the rear to find the reset button. About pairing and how to
launched late 2017 (Cisco Touch 10). This device is identified 2. Press and hold the reset button until the mute button at the connect Touch 10 to the
by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back. front starts blinking (approximately 5 seconds). Then release
the button. video system
See the next page for the older version.
Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings In order to use the Touch 10 controller,
and restarts. Touch 10 must either be directly
connected to the codec, or paired to the
In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch If Touch 10 is directly connected to the video system it codec via LAN. The latter is referred to as
controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when receives a new configuration automatically from the video remote pairing.
in contact with the Cisco support organization. system.
Read about pairing and how to connect
When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing If Touch 10 is connected via LAN the device must be paired to Touch 10 to the video system in the
information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video system) is the video system anew. When successfully paired it receives ► Connect the Touch 10 controller
reverted to factory defaults. a new configuration automatically from the video system. chapter.

It is not possible to undo a factory reset.

Open the cover to

find the reset button

Reset button

Mute button starts blinking

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
96
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Factory reset the Cisco TelePresence Touch 10

This chapter applies to the first Touch 10 controller (Cisco
1. Locate the Mute and Volume down buttons. About pairing and how to
TelePresence Touch 10). This device has no logo on front. 2. Press and hold the Mute button until it starts blinking (red and connect Touch 10 to the
green). It takes approximately 10 seconds.
See the previous page for the newer version that was video system
launched late 2017. 3. Press the Volume down button twice.
In order to use the Touch 10 controller,
Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings Touch 10 must either be directly
and restarts. connected to the codec, or paired to the
In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch codec via LAN. The latter is referred to as
If Touch 10 is directly connected to the video system it remote pairing.
controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when
receives a new configuration automatically from the video
in contact with the Cisco support organization.
system. Read about pairing and how to connect
When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing Touch 10 to the video system in the
If Touch 10 is connected via LAN the device must be paired to ► Connect the Touch 10 controller
information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video system) is
the video system anew. When successfully paired it receives chapter.
reverted to factory defaults.
a new configuration automatically from the video system.

It is not possible to undo a factory reset.

Mute

Volume down

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
97
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Maintenance System settings Appendices

Capture user interface screenshots

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > About user interface
User Interface Screenshots.
screenshots
You can capture screenshots both of
a Touch controller that is connected to
the video system, and of the on-screen
display (menus, indicators and messages
on the main display).

Delete screenshots
If you want to delete all screenshots,
click Remove all.
To delete just one screenshot, click
the × button for that screenshot.

Capture a screenshot
Click Take screenshot of Touch Panel to
capture a screenshot of the Touch controller,
or click Take screenshot of OSD to capture a
screenshot of the on-screen display.
The screenshot displays in the area below
the buttons. It may take up to 30 seconds
before the screenshot is ready.
All captured snapshots are included
in the list above the buttons. Click the
screenshot ID to display the image.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
98
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Chapter 5

System settings

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
99
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Overview of the system settings

In the following pages you will find a complete list of the system Audio settings................................................................................................................ 105
settings which are configured from the Setup > Configuration Audio DefaultVolume.......................................................................................................... 105
page on the web interface. Audio Input HDMI [1..3] Level............................................................................................. 106
Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the video Audio Input HDMI [1..3] Mode............................................................................................ 106
system then sign in. Audio Input HDMI [1..3] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo....................................... 106
Audio Input Line [1..4] Channel.......................................................................................... 107
Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer ID..................................................................................... 107
How to find the IP address Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer Mode............................................................................... 107
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner Audio Input Line [1..4] Level............................................................................................... 107
of the user interface. Audio Input Line [1..4] Mode............................................................................................... 108
2. Select Settings, followed by About this device. Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo......................................... 107
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource.............................................. 107
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Dereverberation............................................. 108
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Mode............................................................. 108
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl NoiseReduction............................................. 108
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer ID......................................................................... 108
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer Mode................................................................... 108
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Level................................................................................... 109
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Mode.................................................................................. 109
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Type.....................................................................................110
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo............................ 109
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource.................................. 109
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain.............................................................................. 106
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [1..8] Mode...................................... 105
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [1..4] Mode................................................ 105
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled..................................................................................... 105
Audio Output HDMI [1..2] Level...........................................................................................110
Audio Output HDMI [1..2] Mode...........................................................................................110
Audio Output Line [1..6] Channel........................................................................................110
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay DelayMs..............................................................................110
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay Mode...................................................................................110
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer ID................................................................................... 111
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer Mode............................................................................. 111
Audio Output Line [1..6] Level............................................................................................. 111
Audio Output Line [1..6] Mode............................................................................................. 111
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone..................................................................................... 106
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume................................................................................. 106

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
100
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume............................................................................................. 111 Conference CallProtocolIPStack........................................................................................ 120

Audio Ultrasound Mode...................................................................................................... 111 Conference DefaultCall Protocol........................................................................................121
Conference DefaultCall Rate...............................................................................................121
CallHistory settings.........................................................................................................112
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout.........................................................................121
CallHistory Mode.................................................................................................................112
Conference Encryption Mode.............................................................................................121
Cameras settings............................................................................................................113 Conference FarEndControl Mode.......................................................................................121
Cameras Camera [1..7] AssignedSerialNumber..................................................................113 Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability...................................................................... 122
Cameras Camera [1..7] Backlight DefaultMode...................................................................113 Conference FarEndMessage Mode................................................................................... 122
Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness DefaultLevel.................................................................113 Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode............................................................................124
Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness Mode...........................................................................113 Conference MaxReceiveCallRate...................................................................................... 122
Cameras Camera [1..7] Flip.................................................................................................113 Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate............................................................................... 122
Cameras Camera [1..7] Focus Mode...................................................................................114 Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate.............................................................................. 123
Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Level.................................................................................114 Conference MaxTransmitCallRate...................................................................................... 122
Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Mode................................................................................114 Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode.................................................................... 123
Cameras Camera [1..7] Mirror.............................................................................................114 Conference Multipoint Mode............................................................................................. 123
Cameras Camera [1..7] MotorMoveDetection.....................................................................115 Conference MultiStream Mode.......................................................................................... 123
Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Level.......................................................................115 Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold.......................................................................124
Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Mode......................................................................115 Conference Presentation RelayQuality...............................................................................124
Cameras PowerLine Frequency..........................................................................................115 Conference VideoBandwidth Mode....................................................................................124
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Pan...................................................................115
FacilityService settings.................................................................................................. 125
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Tilt....................................................................116
FacilityService Service [1..5] CallType............................................................................... 125
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Zoom................................................................116
FacilityService Service [1..5] Name................................................................................... 125
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector...................................................................................116
FacilityService Service [1..5] Number................................................................................ 125
Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled.......................................................................................116
FacilityService Service [1..5] Type..................................................................................... 125
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetectedStatus...........................................................116
Cameras PresenterTrack TriggerZone................................................................................117 GPIO settings................................................................................................................. 126
Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus......................................................................................117 GPIO Pin [1..4] Mode.......................................................................................................... 126
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup.........................................................................................117
H323 settings................................................................................................................. 127
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft..................................................118
H323 Authentication LoginName........................................................................................127
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight................................................118
H323 Authentication Mode.................................................................................................127
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode...........................................................118
H323 Authentication Password..........................................................................................127
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode.............................................................................................117
H323 CallSetup Mode.........................................................................................................127
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode...............................................................................118
H323 Encryption KeySize................................................................................................... 128
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode.........................................................................119
H323 Gatekeeper Address................................................................................................ 128
Conference settings...................................................................................................... 120 H323 H323Alias E164........................................................................................................ 128
Conference ActiveControl Mode....................................................................................... 120 H323 H323Alias ID............................................................................................................. 128
Conference AutoAnswer Delay.......................................................................................... 120 H323 NAT Address............................................................................................................ 129
Conference AutoAnswer Mode......................................................................................... 120 H323 NAT Mode................................................................................................................ 128
Conference AutoAnswer Mute.......................................................................................... 120 H323 PortAllocation........................................................................................................... 129

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
101
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Logging settings............................................................................................................ 130 Network [1..1] QoS Mode................................................................................................... 136

Logging External Mode...................................................................................................... 130 Network [1..1] RemoteAccess Allow................................................................................... 137
Logging External Protocol.................................................................................................. 130 Network [1..1] Speed.......................................................................................................... 138
Logging External Server Address...................................................................................... 130 Network [1..1] TrafficControl Mode..................................................................................... 138
Logging External Server Port............................................................................................. 130 Network [1..1] VLAN Voice Mode....................................................................................... 138
Logging Mode.................................................................................................................... 130 Network [1..1] VLAN Voice VlanId....................................................................................... 138

Macros settings............................................................................................................. 131 NetworkServices settings.............................................................................................. 139

Macros AutoStart................................................................................................................131 NetworkServices CDP Mode............................................................................................. 139
Macros Mode......................................................................................................................131 NetworkServices H323 Mode........................................................................................... 139
NetworkServices HTTP Mode........................................................................................... 139
Network settings............................................................................................................ 132
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName........................................................................ 139
Network [1..1] DNS DNSSEC Mode.................................................................................... 132
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode................................................................................. 140
Network [1..1] DNS Domain Name...................................................................................... 132
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl............................................................................... 140
Network [1..1] DNS Server [1..3] Address........................................................................... 132
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password.......................................................................... 140
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity.................................................................... 133
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url...................................................................................... 140
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Md5.................................................................................... 133
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode...............................................................................141
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Peap................................................................................... 134
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL.................................................................................141
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls....................................................................................... 134
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion...................................................... 140
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls...................................................................................... 133
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity............................................................. 140
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Identity....................................................................................... 133
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate................................................................141
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Mode......................................................................................... 132
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate..............................................................141
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Password................................................................................... 133
NetworkServices NTP Mode..............................................................................................142
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X TlsVerify..................................................................................... 132
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] Address......................................................................142
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate.................................................................. 133
NetworkServices SIP Mode................................................................................................142
Network [1..1] IPStack......................................................................................................... 134
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName....................................................................... 143
Network [1..1] IPv4 Address............................................................................................... 134
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address......................................................................142
Network [1..1] IPv4 Assignment.......................................................................................... 134
NetworkServices SNMP Mode...........................................................................................142
Network [1..1] IPv4 Gateway............................................................................................... 134
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact.......................................................................... 143
Network [1..1] IPv4 SubnetMask......................................................................................... 135
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation......................................................................... 143
Network [1..1] IPv6 Address............................................................................................... 135
NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey.............................................................................. 143
Network [1..1] IPv6 Assignment.......................................................................................... 135
NetworkServices SSH Mode............................................................................................. 143
Network [1..1] IPv6 DHCPOptions...................................................................................... 135
NetworkServices Telnet Mode.......................................................................................... 143
Network [1..1] IPv6 Gateway............................................................................................... 135
NetworkServices UPnP Mode........................................................................................... 144
Network [1..1] MTU............................................................................................................. 135
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout....................................................................................... 144
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Audio...................................................................................... 136
NetworkServices WelcomeText......................................................................................... 144
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Data........................................................................................ 136
NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode....................................................................................... 144
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6.................................................................................. 137
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv NTP........................................................................................ 137 Peripherals settings....................................................................................................... 145
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Signalling................................................................................ 137 Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience...................................................... 145
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Video...................................................................................... 136 Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing...................................................... 145

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
102
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Peripherals Profile Cameras.............................................................................................. 145 Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime...................................................................... 155

Peripherals Profile ControlSystems................................................................................... 145 Security Session InactivityTimeout.................................................................................... 155
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels........................................................................................ 146 Security Session MaxFailedLogins.................................................................................... 155
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser............................................................................ 155
Phonebook settings....................................................................................................... 147
Security Session MaxTotalSessions.................................................................................. 156
Phonebook Server [1..1] ID..................................................................................................147
Security Session ShowLastLogon..................................................................................... 156
Phonebook Server [1..1] Type.............................................................................................147
Phonebook Server [1..1] URL..............................................................................................147 SerialPort settings......................................................................................................... 157
SerialPort BaudRate........................................................................................................... 157
Provisioning settings...................................................................................................... 148
SerialPort LoginRequired................................................................................................... 157
Provisioning Connectivity.................................................................................................. 148
SerialPort Mode................................................................................................................. 157
Provisioning ExternalManager Address............................................................................. 149
Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress............................................................... 149 SIP settings.................................................................................................................... 158
Provisioning ExternalManager Domain.............................................................................. 150 SIP ANAT........................................................................................................................... 158
Provisioning ExternalManager Path................................................................................... 149 SIP Authentication Password............................................................................................. 158
Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol............................................................................. 149 SIP Authentication UserName........................................................................................... 158
Provisioning LoginName.................................................................................................... 148 SIP DefaultTransport.......................................................................................................... 158
Provisioning Mode............................................................................................................. 148 SIP DisplayName................................................................................................................ 158
Provisioning Password....................................................................................................... 149 SIP Ice DefaultCandidate................................................................................................... 159
Provisioning RoomType ClassroomEnabled....................................................................... 149 SIP Ice Mode...................................................................................................................... 159
SIP Line.............................................................................................................................. 159
Proximity settings.......................................................................................................... 151
SIP ListenPort.................................................................................................................... 159
Proximity Mode...................................................................................................................151
SIP Mailbox........................................................................................................................ 159
Proximity Services CallControl...........................................................................................151
SIP MinimumTLSVersion.................................................................................................... 160
Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients...................................................................151
SIP PreferredIPMedia......................................................................................................... 160
Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients.......................................................................151
SIP PreferredIPSignaling.................................................................................................... 160
RoomAnalytics settings................................................................................................. 152 SIP Proxy [1..4] Address..................................................................................................... 160
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector.......................................................................... 152 SIP TlsVerify....................................................................................................................... 160
SIP Turn DiscoverMode..................................................................................................... 160
RTP settings................................................................................................................... 153
SIP Turn DropRflx................................................................................................................161
RTP Ports Range Start....................................................................................................... 153
SIP Turn Password..............................................................................................................161
RTP Ports Range Stop....................................................................................................... 153
SIP Turn Server...................................................................................................................161
RTP Video Ports Range Start............................................................................................. 153
SIP Turn UserName............................................................................................................161
RTP Video Ports Range Stop............................................................................................. 153
SIP Type..............................................................................................................................161
Security settings............................................................................................................ 154 SIP URI................................................................................................................................161
Security Audit Logging Mode............................................................................................ 154
Standby settings............................................................................................................ 162
Security Audit OnError Action............................................................................................ 154
Standby BootAction........................................................................................................... 162
Security Audit Server Address.......................................................................................... 154
Standby Control................................................................................................................. 162
Security Audit Server Port................................................................................................. 155
Standby Delay.................................................................................................................... 162
Security Audit Server PortAssignment.............................................................................. 155
Standby StandbyAction..................................................................................................... 162

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
103
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Standby WakeupAction...................................................................................................... 162 Video settings................................................................................................................ 173

Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection................................................................................. 162 Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition............................................................................173
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local........................................................................................173
SystemUnit settings....................................................................................................... 163
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote....................................................................................174
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced............................................................................. 163
Video DefaultMainSource...................................................................................................174
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode.................................................................................... 163
Video Input Connector [1..4] PresentationSelection...........................................................176
SystemUnit CrashReporting Url......................................................................................... 163
Video Input Connector [1..4] RGBQuantizationRange........................................................ 177
SystemUnit Name.............................................................................................................. 163
Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl CameraId.....................................................174
Time settings................................................................................................................. 164 Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl Mode............................................................174
Time DateFormat............................................................................................................... 164 Video Input Connector [1..5] InputSourceType...................................................................175
Time TimeFormat............................................................................................................... 164 Video Input Connector [1..5] Name.....................................................................................175
Time Zone.......................................................................................................................... 165 Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Profile........................................................175
Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps.........................................176
UserInterface settings.................................................................................................... 167
Video Input Connector [1..5] Quality.................................................................................. 177
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification........................................................ 167
Video Input Connector [1..5] Visibility................................................................................ 177
UserInterface ContactInfo Type......................................................................................... 167
Video Input Connector [4..4] DviType.................................................................................175
UserInterface CustomMessage......................................................................................... 167
Video Input Connector [5] SignalType............................................................................... 177
UserInterface KeyTones Mode........................................................................................... 168
Video Monitors....................................................................................................................178
UserInterface Language.................................................................................................... 168
Video Output Connector [1..2] CEC Mode..........................................................................178
UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator............................................................................. 168
Video Output Connector [1..3] Location HorizontalOffset...................................................179
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage.............................................................................. 168
Video Output Connector [1..3] Location VerticalOffset.......................................................179
UserInterface OSD Output................................................................................................. 169
Video Output Connector [1..3] MonitorRole....................................................................... 180
UserInterface Security Mode............................................................................................. 169
Video Output Connector [1..3] Resolution.......................................................................... 180
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode.................................................................................... 169
Video Output Connector [1..3] RGBQuantizationRange..................................................... 180
UserInterface Wallpaper.................................................................................................... 169
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition.............................................................................. 180
UserManagement settings............................................................................................. 170 Video Presentation DefaultSource......................................................................................181
UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter.................................................................................171 Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode.............................................................................181
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group...............................................................................171 Video Selfview Default Mode..............................................................................................181
UserManagement LDAP Attribute.......................................................................................171 Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole...............................................................................181
UserManagement LDAP BaseDN.......................................................................................172 Video Selfview Default PIPPosition.................................................................................... 182
UserManagement LDAP Encryption...................................................................................170 Video Selfview OnCall Duration......................................................................................... 182
UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion....................................................................171 Video Selfview OnCall Mode............................................................................................. 182
UserManagement LDAP Mode...........................................................................................170
Experimental settings.................................................................................................... 183
UserManagement LDAP Server Address...........................................................................170
UserManagement LDAP Server Port..................................................................................170
UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate................................................................171

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
104
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio settings

Audio DefaultVolume Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [1..8] Mode

Define the default volume for the speakers. The volume is set to this value when you switch Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each microphone. The
on or restart the video system. Use the controls on the user interface to change the volume signals from all microphones with Mode = On will be mixed and fed to the selected
while it is running. You may also use API commands (xCommand Audio Volume) to change MicrophoneReinforcement outputs. Also consult the Audio MicrophoneReinforcement
the volume while the video system is running, and to reset to default value. Output Line Mode setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 50 Default value: Off

Value space: Integer (0..100) Value space: Off/On

Range: Select a value between 1 and 100. This corresponds to the dB range from -34.5 On: The microphone signal will be fed to the selected MicrophoneReinforcement
dB to 15 dB, in steps of 0.5 dB. If set to 0 the audio is switched off. outputs, as well as to the far end.
Off: The microphone signal will be sent only to the far end. It will not be fed to the
selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled
Define the microphone mute behavior on the video system.
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [1..4] Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each line output. If Mode = On, the
Default value: True line output will add the microphone reinforcement mix to its ordinary output signal. Also
consult the Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone Mode setting.
Value space: True/InCallOnly
True: Muting of audio is always available. Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
InCallOnly: Muting of audio is only available when the device is in a call. When Idle it is Default value: Off
not possible to mute the microphone. This is useful when an external telephone service/
audio system is connected via the codec and is to be available when the codec is not Value space: Off/On
in a call. When set to InCallOnly this will prevent the audio-system from being muted by On: This output will deliver far end audio, local presentation audio and the microphone
mistake. reinforcement mix.
Off: This output will deliver far end audio and local presentation audio.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
105
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain Audio Input HDMI [1..3] Level

The gain (in dB) that will be applied to the mixed microphone signal that is fed to the Set the gain on the HDMI input connector. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: 0
Default value: -54
Value space: Integer (-24..0)
Value space: Integer (-54..15) Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Use this gain to adjust the level of microphone signal that should be fed to the local
output. The value -54 means "Off", and no signal will be fed from the microphone to the
output. Audio Input HDMI [1..3] Mode
Define if the audio on the HDMI input connector shall be enabled.
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define which ringtone to use for incoming calls. Default value: HDMI [1..2]: Off HDMI [3]: On

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER Value space: Off/On

Default value: Sunrise Off: Disable audio on the HDMI input.

Value space: Sunrise/Mischief/Ripples/Reflections/Vibes/Delight/Evolve/Playful/Ascent/ On: Enable audio on the HDMI input.

Calculation/Mellow/Ringer
Select a ringtone from the list.
Audio Input HDMI [1..3] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Use this setting to decide whether to stop the audio playback of a connected presentation
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume source if that presentation source is not currently shown on-screen, or to always playback
the audio as long as the presentation source is connected.
Define the ring volume for incoming calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: On
Default value: 50
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Integer (0..100)
Off: Audio is played, locally and to far end, as long as a presentation source is
Range: The value goes in steps of 5 from 0 to 100 (from -34.5 dB to 15 dB). Volume 0 = connected; you do not have to present the HDMI input source.
Off.
On: Audio is played, locally and to far end, only when the connected presentation source
is shown on-screen.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
106
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer ID Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
Select the equalizer ID of the audio source that is connected to the line input. The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1 Default value: Line [1, 2]: 4 Line [3, 4]: 1

Value space: Integer (1..8) Value space: 1/2/3/4/5

Set the equalizer ID. Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.

Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer Mode Audio Input Line [1..4] Channel
Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the line input. Define whether the audio source on the line input is a mono signal or part of a multichannel
signal.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Left
Value space: Off/On
Off: No equalizer. Value space: Left/Mono/Right
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio source that is connected to the line input. Left: The Audio Line input signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Mono: The Audio Line input signal is a mono signal.
Right: The Audio Line input signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and
you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is Audio Input Line [1..4] Level
presented or not. Set the gain on the Line input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the output
level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio
Default value: Line [1, 2]: On Line [3, 4]: Off signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
Value space: Off/On The maximum input level with 0 dB gain is 22 dBu.
Off: The audio source is not associated with a video source. The audio will be played Example: If your audio source has a maximum output level of 8 dBu, then you should set the
locally and to far end regardless of whether the video source is presented. gain to 22 dBu - 8 dBu = 14 dB.
On: The audio source is associated with a video source. The audio will be played (locally Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
and to far end) when the associated video source is presented. The audio will be muted
when the video source is not presented. Default value: 10

Value space: Integer (0..24)

Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
107
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio Input Line [1..4] Mode Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Dereverberation
Define the mode for the audio input line. The system has built-in signal processing to reduce the effect of room reverberation.
Dereverberation requires that Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the Audio Line input. Value space: Off/On
On: Enable the Audio Line input. Off: Turn off the dereverberation.
On: Turn on the dereverberation.

Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Mode

The echo canceller continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room, and
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer ID
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in the Select the equalizer ID of the source that is connected to the microphone input.
audio conditions are significant, the echo canceller may take a second or two to re-adjust.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: 1
Default value: On
Value space: Integer (1..8)
Value space: Off/On Set the equalizer ID.
Off: Turn off the echo control. Recommended if external echo cancellation or playback
equipment is used.
On: Turn on the echo control. Recommended, in general, to prevent the far end from Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer Mode
hearing their own audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times.
Define the equalizer mode for the source that is connected to the microphone input.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl NoiseReduction Default value: Off
The system has built-in noise reduction, which reduces stationary background noise, for
example noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc. In addition, a high pass filter Value space: Off/On
(Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise. Noise reduction requires that Audio Input Off: No equalizer.
Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled. On: Enable the equalizer for the source that is connected to the microphone input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Turn off the noise reduction.
On: Turn on the noise reduction. Recommended in the presence of low frequency noise.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
108
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Level
MuteOnInactiveVideo Set the gain on the Microphone input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the
output level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
The microphone can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and
you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio
presented or not. By default, audio is not muted. signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
Note that unprocessed speech signals typically contain significant level variations, making it
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR very important to allow for sufficient signal headroom.
Default value: On The maximum input level with 0 dB gain, is 22 dBu.

Value space: Off/On Example: If your microphone has a maximum output level of -44 dBu, then you should set
the gain to 22 dBu - (-44 dBu) = 66 dB.
Off: No video source is associated.
On: A video source is associated, and the audio will be muted if the associated video Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
source is not displayed. Default value: 58

Value space: Integer (0..70)

Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
VideoInputSource
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with. Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Disable or enable audio on the microphone connector.
Default value: 1
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: 1/2/3/4/5 Default value: On
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the audio input microphone connector.
On: Enable the audio input microphone connector.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
109
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Type Audio Output Line [1..6] Channel
The microphone connectors are intended for electret type microphones. The microphone Define whether the Audio Line output is a mono signal or part of a multichannel signal.
connector can be set to line or microphone mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: Left
Default value: Microphone
Value space: Left/Mono/Right
Value space: Line/Microphone Left: The Audio Line output signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Microphone: Select Microphone when you have 48 V Phantom voltage and the pre- Mono: The Audio Line output signal is a mono signal.
amplification is On.
Right: The Audio Line output signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
Line: Select Line when you have a standard balanced line input. The phantom voltage
and pre-amplification is Off.
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay DelayMs
Audio Output HDMI [1..2] Level To obtain lip-synchronization, you can configure each audio line output with an extra delay
that compensates for delay in other connected devices, for example TVs and external
Set the gain on the HDMI input connector. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB. loudspeakers. The delay that you set here is either fixed or relative to the delay on the HDMI
output, as defined in the Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0 Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (-24..0)
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB). Value space: Integer (0..290)
The delay in milliseconds.

Audio Output HDMI [1..2] Mode

Define if the audio channel on the HDMI output connector shall be enabled. Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay Mode
You may add extra delay to an audio line output with the Audio Output Line [n] Delay
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR DelayMs setting. The extra delay added is either a fixed number of milliseconds, or
Default value: On a number of milliseconds relative to the detected delay on the HDMI output (typically
introduced by the connected TV).
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the audio channel on the HDMI output. Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
On: Enable the audio channel on the HDMI output. Default value: Fixed

Value space: Fixed/RelativeToHDMI

Fixed: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be a fixed number of
millisecond.
RelativeToHDMI: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be relative to the
detected delay on the HDMI output. The actual delay is HDMI-delay + DelayMs. The
Audio Output Connectors Line [n] DelayMs status reports the actual delay.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
110
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer ID Audio Output Line [1..6] Mode
Select the equalizer ID for the audio source that is connected to the output line. Define the mode for the audio line output.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1 Default value: On

Value space: Integer (1..8) Value space: Off/On

Set the equalizer ID. Off: Disable the audio line output.
On: Enable the audio line output.

Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer Mode

Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the output line. Audio Ultrasound Mode
This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Keep the setting at its default value.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Dynamic
Value space: Off/On
Off: No equalizer. Value space: Dynamic/Static
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio output line. Dynamic: The video system adjusts the ultrasound volume dynamically. The volume may
vary up to the maximum level as defined in the Audio Ultrasound Volume MaxVolume
setting.
Audio Output Line [1..6] Level Static: Use only if advised by Cisco.
Set the gain on the Line output connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the audio
input level of the connected device. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
The maximum output level with 0 dB gain is 22 dBu.
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
Example: If he connected audio device has max input level 10 dBu, then you should set the This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Set the maximum volume of the
gain to 10 dBu - 22 dBu = -12 dB. ultrasound pairing message.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: -10 Default value: 70

Value space: Integer (-24..0) Value space: Integer (0..90)

Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB). Select a value in the specified range. If set to 0, the ultrasound is switched off.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
111
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

CallHistory settings

CallHistory Mode
Determine whether or not information about calls that are placed or received are stored,
including missed calls and calls that are not answered (call history). This determines
whether or not the calls appear in the Recents list in the user interfaces.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: New entries are not added to the call history.
On: New entries are stored in the call history list.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
112
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Cameras settings

Cameras Camera [1..7] AssignedSerialNumber Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness Mode

The camera ID is the number n in Camera [n]. By default, the camera ID is assigned Define the camera brightness mode.
automatically to a camera. If EDID information is not passed on from the camera to the
codec, the camera ID is not persistent after a reboot. This means that a camera may get a Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
new camera ID when the codec (video system) is restarted. Default value: Auto
You should use the Cameras Camera AssignedSerialNumber setting to cater for
configurations where the codec does not receive EDID information from multiple cameras. Value space: Auto/Manual
This setting allows you to manually assign a camera ID to a camera by associating the Auto: The camera brightness is automatically set by the system.
camera ID with the camera's serial number. The setting is persistent until the codec is Manual: Enable manual control of the camera brightness. The brightness level is set
factory reset. using the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel setting.
Typical situations where the codec does not receive EDID information are: when you
connect a Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera using 3G-SDI; when you connect a
Cisco TelePresence Precision 40 (Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 1080p4xS2) camera; Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness DefaultLevel
when you use an HDMI repeater that does not pass on EDID information.
Define the brightness level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode to be set to
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Manual.
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: String (0, 20) Default value: 20
The camera's serial number.
Value space: Integer (1..31)
The brightness level.
Cameras Camera [1..7] Backlight DefaultMode
This configuration turns backlight compensation on or off. Backlight compensation is Cameras Camera [1..7] Flip
useful when there is much light behind the persons in the room. Without compensation the
persons will easily appear very dark to the far end. With Flip mode (vertical flip) you can flip the image upside down. Flipping applies both to
Not applicable if you have a Cisco Quad Camera, because this camera automatically adjusts the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end.
itself based on the room lighting conditions.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: Auto
Default value: Off
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Value space: Off/On Auto: If the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image is automatically
Off: Turn off the camera backlight compensation. flipped. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside down or not, the
image is not changed.
On: Turn on the camera backlight compensation.
Off: Display the image on screen the normal way.
On: Display the image flipped upside down. This setting is used when a camera is
mounted upside down, but cannot automatically detect which way it is mounted.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
113
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Cameras Camera [1..7] Focus Mode Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Level
Define the camera focus mode. By setting the Gamma Level you can select which gamma correction table to use. This
setting may be useful in difficult lighting conditions, where changes to the brightness setting
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR does not provide satisfactory results. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode to be
Default value: Auto set to Manual.

Value space: Auto/AutoLimited/Manual Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Auto: When your video system has a Cisco TelePresence Precision 40 Camera or Cisco Default value: 0
TelePresence PrecisionHD 12x Camera: The camera will do single shot auto focusing
once a call is connected, as well as after pan, tilt, zoom have changed. Value space: Integer (0..7)
Auto: Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera: The camera will do continuous auto Define the gamma level.
focusing. It will, more specifically, run auto focus once a call is connected, after pan, tilt,
zoom have changed, and generally when the camera identifies a change in the scene.
Auto: Cisco Quad Camera: The camera will do single shot auto focusing once a call is Cameras Camera [1..7] Mirror
connected and when the view has changed. With Mirror mode (horizontal flip) you can mirror the image on screen. Mirroring applies
AutoLimited: Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera: In most cases this mode will both to the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end. This setting is not
operate the same way as Auto. In some cases AutoLimited will reduce the focus hunting applicable when your video system has a Cisco Quad Camera.
that may occur. Problematic scenes have large areas with no or low contrast, for
instance a painted wall with no details, or maybe a partly empty whiteboard. There’s a Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
slightly higher chance of background focus with this mode, compared to Auto. Default value: Auto
Manual: Turn the autofocus off and adjust the camera focus manually.
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Auto: If the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image is automatically
Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Mode mirrored. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside down or not,
the image is not changed.
This setting enables gamma corrections. Gamma describes the nonlinear relationship
Off: Display the image as other people see you.
between image pixels and monitor brightness.
On: Display the image as you see yourself in a mirror.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual

Auto: Auto is the default and the recommended setting.
Manual: In manual mode the gamma value is changed with the gamma level setting, ref.
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
114
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Cameras Camera [1..7] MotorMoveDetection Cameras PowerLine Frequency

This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 1080p12x camera. If your camera supports power line frequency anti-flickering, the camera is able to
If adjusting the camera position by hand you can configure whether the camera should keep compensate for any flicker noise from the electrical power supply. You should set this
its new position or return to the preset or position it had before. camera configuration based on your power line frequency. If your camera supports auto
detection of line frequency, you can select the Auto option in the configuration.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR All Cisco Precision cameras support both anti-flickering and auto detection of line
Default value: Off frequency. Auto is the default value, so you should change this setting if you have a camera
that does not support auto detection.
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Off: When the camera position is adjusted manually the camera will keep this position
until adjusted again. WARNING: If you manually tilt the camera, the camera will not Default value: Auto
register the new pan and tilt values since there is no position feedback. This will result in
wrong pan and tilt values when recalling the camera presets subsequently. Value space: 50Hz/60Hz/Auto
On: When the camera position is adjusted manually, or the camera detects that the 50Hz: Use this value when the power line frequency is 50 Hz.
motors have moved, it will first re-initialize (i.e. go to default position) then return to the 60Hz: Use this value when the power line frequency is 60 Hz.
preset/position it had before the camera was adjusted. Auto: Allow the camera to detect the power frequency automatically.

Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Mode Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Pan

Define the camera white balance mode. This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SX80 with Precision 60 camera
or SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the pan position which the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature
Default value: Auto is activated.
Value space: Auto/Manual Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Auto: The camera will continuously adjust the white balance depending on the camera Default value: 0
view.
Manual: Enables manual control of the camera white balance. The white balance level is Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
set using the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level setting. The pan position.

Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Level

Define the white balance level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode to be
set to manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 1

Value space: Integer (1..16)

The white balance level.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
115
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Tilt Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled

This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SX80 with Precision 60 camera This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SX80 with Precision 60 camera
or SpeakerTrack 60 camera. or SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
Define the tilt position which the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature is Define whether or not the PresenterTrack feature is available for use.
activated.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: False
Default value: 0
Value space: False/True
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535) False: The PresenterTrack feature is disabled.
The tilt position. True: The PresenterTrack feature is available for use.

Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Zoom Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetectedStatus

This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SX80 with Precision 60 camera This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SX80 with Precision 60 camera
or SpeakerTrack 60 camera. or SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
Define the zoom position which the presenter tracking camera will move to when the Define whether or not to update the Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected status
feature is activated. when a new person enters the trigger zone.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR The status is used by the codec's internal scripts in the Briefing room scenario. This setting
may be used to turn off automatic layout switching in that scenario.
Default value: 0
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
Default value: Enabled
The zoom position.
Value space: Disabled/Enabled
Disabled: The status is not updated when a new person enters the trigger zone.
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector Enabled: The status is updated when a new person enters the trigger zone.
This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SX80 with Precision 60 camera
or SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
Define which video input connector the presenter tracking camera is connected to.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 1

Value space: Integer (1..5)

The video input connector.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
116
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Cameras PresenterTrack TriggerZone Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode

This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SX80 with Precision 60 camera This setting applies only when using a camera with support for speaker tracking.
or SpeakerTrack 60 camera. For systems with a Cisco Quad Camera: Speaker tracking uses automatic camera framing
Define the image coordinates of the trigger zone on the video system screen. A person's to select the best camera view based on how many people are in the room. The Quad
head must have been inside this region of the image in order to be tracked. Camera consists of two cameras and uses an audio tracking technique that finds and
The format is a string of x and y coordinate pairs: "x1,y1,...xn,yn", where the range of x is captures a close-up of the active speaker.
(0,1920) and y is (0,1080). Two coordinate pairs define the upper left and lower right corner For systems with a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 Camera: The dual camera
of a rectangular trigger zone. More than two coordinate pairs define the vertices of a assembly consists of two cameras and uses an audio tracking technique that finds and
polygonal trigger zone. captures a close-up of the active speaker. When a change of speaker is detected, the
system can switch automatically between the two cameras to always show the best camera
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR view. Refer to the Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode setting for different switching
Default value: "" modes.

Value space: String (0..255) Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

The coordinates for the trigger zone. Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual

Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus Auto: Speaker tracking is switched on. The system will detect people in the room and
automatically select the best camera framing. Users can switch speaker track on or off
The current position (pan and tilt), zoom and focus are stored with a preset. Use this setting instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller.
to determine if the camera should refocus or use the focus value that is stored with the
Off: Speaker tracking is switched off. If you have a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60
preset.
Camera the two cameras operate as individual cameras.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
Value space: Auto/Off/On This setting applies only when the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto.
Auto: Whether the camera refocuses or not when selecting a preset, depends on the When a person in the room speaks the system will find the person and select the best
camera type. camera framing. This is called a closeup and may not include all the persons in the room.
Off: The focus value that is stored with the preset will be used. The camera will not If you want all the persons in the room to be in the picture at all times you can turn off the
refocus when selecting a preset. closeup functionality.
On: The camera will refocus when selecting a preset. The focus value that is stored with
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
the preset may be overridden.
Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual

Auto: The system will zoom in on the person speaking.
Off: The system will keep all the persons in the room in the camera framing at all times.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
117
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft

This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera, and Define the number of the video input that SpeakerTrack 60's left camera is connected to.
when Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto. This setting applies only when a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera is connected
The speaker tracking algorithm can react to changes in two modes, one faster than the to the codec (video system). Furthermore, Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection
other. The mode determines when the camera view will change to a new speaker. Mode must be set to Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto Default value: 1

Value space: Auto/Conservative Value space: Integer (1..5)

Auto: Normal tracking mode. Set a valid video input number. For example, set to 1 if the left camera is connected to
Conservative: The camera view will change to a new speaker later than in Normal mode. video input 1.

Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight

This setting applies only when a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera is connected Define the number of the video input that SpeakerTrack 60's right camera is connected to.
to the codec (video system). This setting applies only when a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera is connected
Define whether to automatically detect or manually configure which video input each to the codec (video system). Furthermore, Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection
individual camera is connected to. You should choose manual configuration in situations Mode must be set to Manual.
where the codec does not receive EDID information from the cameras. Typically, this will be
when you use HDMI repeaters that do not pass on EDID information. Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto Value space: Integer (1..5)
Set a valid video input number. For example, set to 2 if the right camera is connected to
Value space: Auto/Manual video input 2.
Auto: Automatically detect which video inputs the cameras are connected to.
Manual: Manually define which video inputs the cameras are connected to. Use the
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft and Cameras SpeakerTrack
ConnectorDetection CameraRight settings.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
118
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode

This setting applies only when using a camera with support for speaker tracking.
The Snap to Whiteboard feature extends the speaker tracking functionality, thus you
need a camera that supports speaker tracking. When a presenter is standing next to the
whiteboard, the camera will capture both the presenter and the whiteboard if the Snap to
Whiteboard feature is enabled. If the feature is disabled, only the presenter will be captured.
The Snap to Whiteboard feature is set up from the Touch controller or web interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is disabled.
On: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is enabled.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
119
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Conference settings

Conference ActiveControl Mode Conference AutoAnswer Mute

Active control is a feature that allows conference participants to administer a conference on Define if the microphone shall be muted when an incoming call is automatically answered.
Cisco TelePresence Server or Cisco Meeting Server using the video system's interfaces. Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.
Each user can see the participant list, change video layout, disconnect participants, etc.
from the interface. The active control feature is enabled by default, provided that it is Requires user role: ADMIN
supported by the infrastructure (Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) version Default value: Off
9.1.2 or newer, Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS) version X8.1 or
newer, Cisco Media Server (CMS) version 2.1 or newer). Change this setting if you want to Value space: Off/On
disable the active control features. Off: The incoming call will not be muted.
Requires user role: ADMIN On: The incoming call will be muted when automatically answered.
Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Off Conference AutoAnswer Delay

Auto: Active control is enabled when supported by the infrastructure. Define how long (in seconds) an incoming call has to wait before it is answered
Off: Active control is disabled. automatically by the system. Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Conference AutoAnswer Mode Default value: 0

Define the auto answer mode. Use the Conference AutoAnswer Delay setting if you want Value space: Integer (0..50)
the system to wait a number of seconds before answering the call, and use the Conference The auto answer delay (seconds).
AutoAnswer Mute setting if you want your microphone to be muted when the call is
answered.

Requires user role: ADMIN Conference CallProtocolIPStack

Default value: Off Select if the system should enable IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack on the call protocol (SIP,
H323).
Value space: Off/On
Off: You must answer incoming calls manually by tapping Answer on the Touch Requires user role: ADMIN
controller. Default value: Dual
On: The system automatically answers incoming calls, except if you are already in a
call. You must always answer or decline incoming calls manually when you are already Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6
engaged in a call. Dual: Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 for the call protocol.
IPv4: When set to IPv4, the call protocol will use IPv4.
IPv6: When set to IPv6, the call protocol will use IPv6.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
120
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Conference DefaultCall Protocol Conference Encryption Mode

Define the Default Call Protocol to be used when placing calls from the system. Define the conference encryption mode. A padlock with the text "Encryption On" or
"Encryption Off" displays on screen for a few seconds when the conference starts.
Requires user role: ADMIN NOTE: If the Encryption Option Key is not installed on the video system, the encryption
Default value: Auto mode is always Off.

Value space: Auto/H320/H323/Sip/Spark Requires user role: ADMIN

Auto: Enables auto-selection of the call protocol based on which protocols are available. Default value: BestEffort
If multiple protocols are available, the order of priority is: 1) SIP; 2) H323; 3) H320. If the
system cannot register, the auto-selection chooses H323. Value space: Off/On/BestEffort
H320: All calls are set up as H.320 calls (only applicable if used with Cisco TelePresence Off: The system will not use encryption.
ISDN Link). On: The system will only allow calls that are encrypted.
H323: All calls are set up as H.323 calls. BestEffort: The system will use encryption whenever possible.
Sip: All calls are set up as SIP calls. > In Point to point calls: If the far end system supports encryption (AES-128), the call will
Spark: Reserved for Webex registered systems. Do not use. be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.
> In MultiSite calls: In order to have encrypted MultiSite conferences, all sites must
support encryption. If not, the conference will be unencrypted.
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Define the Default Call Rate to be used when placing calls from the system.
Conference FarEndControl Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Lets you decide if the remote side (far end) should be allowed to select your video sources
Default value: 6000 and control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom).

Value space: Integer (64..6000) Requires user role: ADMIN

The default call rate (kbps). Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout Off: The far end is not allowed to select your video sources or to control your local
camera (pan, tilt, zoom).
This setting determines the default duration of a Do Not Disturb session, i.e. the period
when incoming calls are rejected and registered as missed calls. The session can be On: Allows the far end to be able to select your video sources and control your local
terminated earlier by using the user interface. camera (pan, tilt, zoom). You will still be able to control your camera and select your
video sources as normal.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 60

Value space: Integer (1..1440)

The number of minutes (maximum 1440 minutes = 24 hours) before the Do Not Disturb
session times out automatically.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
121
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability Conference MaxTransmitCallRate

Define the far end control (H.224) signal capability mode. Define the maximum transmit bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls.
Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference
Requires user role: ADMIN MaxTotalTransmitCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active
Default value: On calls.

Value space: Off/On Requires user role: ADMIN

Off: Disable the far end control signal capability. Default value: 6000
On: Enable the far end control signal capability. Value space: Integer (64..6000)
The maximum transmitt call rate (kbps).
Conference FarEndMessage Mode
Toggle whether it is allowed to send data between two codecs in a point-to-point call, for Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate
use with control systems or macros. Works with SIP calls only. This setting will enable/
disable the use of the xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send command. This configuration applies when using a video system's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to
host a multipoint video conference.
Requires user role: ADMIN Define the maximum overall receive bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly among
Default value: Off all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or down-
speeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or when a
Value space: Off/On call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed.
Off: It is not possible to send messages between two codecs. The maximum receive bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference
On: It is possible to send messages between two codecs in a point-to-point call. MaxReceiveCallRate setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 6000
Conference MaxReceiveCallRate
Define the maximum receive bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls. Value space: Integer (64..6000)
Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference The maximum receive call rate (kbps).
MaxTotalReceiveCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active
calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 6000

Value space: Integer (64..6000)

The maximum receive call rate (kbps).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
122
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate Conference Multipoint Mode

This configuration applies when using a video system's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to Define how the video system handles multiparty video conferences (ad hoc conferences).
host a multipoint video conference. If registered to a Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS), the video system
Define the maximum overall transmit bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly can use its own built-in MultiSite feature. If registered to a Cisco Unified Communications
among all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or Manager (CUCM) version 8.6.2 or newer, the video system can use either the CUCM
down-speeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or conference bridge, or the video system's own built-in MultiSite feature. Which option to use,
when a call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed. is set-up by CUCM.
The maximum transmit bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference The CUCM conference bridge allows you to set up conferences with many participants. The
MaxTransmitCallRate setting. built-in MultiSite allows up to five participants (yourself included) plus one additional audio
call.
Requires user role: ADMIN The built-in MultiSite is optional and may not be available on all video systems.
Default value: 6000
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Integer (64..6000) Default value: Auto
The maximum transmit call rate (kbps).
Value space: Auto/CUCMMediaResourceGroupList/MultiSite/Off
Auto: The multipoint method is selected automatically; if no multipoint method is
Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode available, the Multipoint Mode will be set to Off.
Define if the microphones shall be unmuted automatically when all calls are disconnected. CUCMMediaResourceGroupList: Multiparty conferences are hosted by the CUCM
In a meeting room or other shared resources this may be done to prepare the system for configured conference bridge. This setting is provisioned by CUCM in a CUCM
the next user. environment, and should never be set manually by the user.
MultiSite: Multiparty conferences are set up using the built-in MultiSite feature. If
Requires user role: ADMIN MultiSite is selected when the MultiSite feature is not available, the Multipoint Mode will
Default value: On automatically be set to Off.
Off: Multiparty conferences are not allowed.
Value space: Off/On
Off: If muted during a call, let the microphones remain muted after the call is
disconnected. Conference MultiStream Mode
On: Unmute the microphones after the call is disconnected.
The video system supports multistream video for conferences.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Off

Auto: Multistream will be used when the conference infrastructure supports the feature.
Minimum versions required: CMS 2.2, CUCM 11.5, VCS X8.7.
Off: Multistream is disabled.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
123
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold

Select whether or not to allow incoming calls when already in a call/conference. Define whether or not to continue sharing a presentation after the remote site has put you
on hold.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Allow Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: NoAction
Value space: Allow/Deny
Allow: You will be notified when someone calls you while you are already in a call. Value space: Stop/NoAction
You can accept the incoming call or not. The ongoing call may be put on hold while Stop: The video system stops the presentation sharing when the remote site puts you on
answering the incoming call; or you may merge the calls (requires support for multiparty hold. The presentation will not continue when the call is resumed.
video conferences). NoAction: The video system will not stop the presentation sharing when put on hold. The
Deny: An incoming call will be rejected if you are already in a call. You will not be notified presentation will not be shared while you are on hold, but it will continue automatically
about the incoming call. However, the call will appear as a missed call in the call history when the call is resumed.
list.

Conference VideoBandwidth Mode

Conference Presentation RelayQuality Define the conference video bandwidth mode.
This configuration applies to video systems that are using the built-in MultiSite feature
(optional) to host a multipoint video conference. When a remote user shares a presentation, Requires user role: ADMIN
the video system will transcode the presentation and send it to the other participants in the Default value: Dynamic
multipoint conference. The RelayQuality setting specifies whether to give priority to high
frame rate or to high resolution for the presentation source. Value space: Dynamic/Static
Dynamic: The available transmit bandwidth for the video channels are distributed among
Requires user role: ADMIN
the currently active channels. If there is no presentation, the main video channels will
Default value: Sharpness use the bandwidth of the presentation channel.

Value space: Motion/Sharpness Static: The available transmit bandwidth is assigned to each video channel, even if it is
not active.
Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher
frame rates, typically when there is a lot of motion in the picture.
Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest
quality of detailed images and graphics.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
124
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

FacilityService settings

FacilityService Service [1..5] Type FacilityService Service [1..5] Number

Up to five different facility services can be supported simultaneously. With this setting you Define the number (URI or phone number) of the facility service. Up to five different facility
can select what kind of services they are. A facility service is not available unless both the services are supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService
FacilityService Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set.
properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface. Facility services are available from the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Helpdesk Default value: ""

Value space: Catering/Concierge/Emergency/Helpdesk/Security/Transportation/Other Value space: String (0, 1024)

Catering: Select this option for catering services. The number (URI or phone number) of the facility service.
Concierge: Select this option for concierge services.
Emergency: Select this option for emergency services.
Helpdesk: Select this option for helpdesk services.
FacilityService Service [1..5] CallType
Security: Select this option for security services. Define the call type for each facility service. Up to five different facility services are
supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n]
Transportation: Select this option for transportation services. Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services
Other: Select this option for services not covered by the other options. are available from the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

FacilityService Service [1..5] Name Default value: Video
Define the name of the facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported. Value space: Audio/Video
A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n] Name and the
FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. The name will show on the Audio: Select this option for audio calls.
facility service call button, which appears when you tap the question mark icon in the top Video: Select this option for video calls.
bar. Facility services are available from the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Service 1: "Live Support" Other services: ""

Value space: String (0, 1024)

The name of the facility service.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
125
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

GPIO settings

GPIO Pin [1..4] Mode

The four GPIO pins are configured individually. The state can be retrieved by xStatus GPIO
Pin [1..4] State. The default pin state is High (+12 V). When activated as an output, a pin is
set to 0 V (Low); when deactivated, it is set to +12 V (High). To activate a pin as an input, the
voltage on the pin must be pulled down to 0 V; to deactivate it, raise the voltage to +12 V.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: InputNoAction

Value space: InputAcceptAllCalls/InputDisconnectAllCalls/InputMuteMicrophones/

InputNoAction/OutputAllCallsEncrypted/OutputInCall/OutputManualState/
OutputMicrophonesMuted/OutputPresentationOn/OutputStandbyActive
InputAcceptAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Accept command,
which accepts all incoming calls, will be issued.
InputDisconnectAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Disconnect
command, which disconnects all calls, will be issued.
InputMuteMicrophones: When the pin is activated, the microphones will be muted. When
deactivated, the microphones will be unmuted.
InputNoAction: The pin state can be set, but no operation is performed.
OutputAllCallsEncrypted: The pin is activated when all calls are encrypted, and
deactivated when one or more calls are not encrypted.
OutputInCall: The pin is activated when in call, and deactivated when not in call.
OutputManualState: The pin state can be set by xCommand GPIO ManualState Set PinX:
High/Low. It is set to +12 V or 0 V, respectively.
OutputMicrophonesMuted: The pin is activated when microphones are muted, and
deactivated when not muted.
OutputPresentationOn: The pin is activated when presentation is active, and deactivated
when presentation is not active.
OutputStandbyActive: The pin is activated when the system is in standby mode, and
deactivated when no longer in standby.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
126
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

H323 settings

H323 Authentication Mode H323 Authentication Password

Define the authenticatin mode for the H.323 profile. The system sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication
Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way
Requires user role: ADMIN authentication from the codec to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the system is authenticated to
Default value: Off the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the
system will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN
Off: The system will not try to authenticate itself to a H.323 Gatekeeper, but will still try a
normal registration. Default value: ""
On: If an H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that it requires authentication, the system will try Value space: String (0, 50)
to authenticate itself to the gatekeeper. Requires the H323 Authentication LoginName
and H323 Authentication Password settings to be defined on both the codec and the The authentication password.
Gatekeeper.

H323 CallSetup Mode

H323 Authentication LoginName Defines whether to use a Gatekeeper or Direct calling when establishing H.323 calls.
The system sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication Direct H.323 calls can be made also when H323 CallSetup Mode is set to Gatekeeper.
Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way
authentication from the codec to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the system is authenticated to Requires user role: ADMIN
the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the Default value: Gatekeeper
system will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
Value space: Direct/Gatekeeper
Requires user role: ADMIN
Direct: You can only make an H.323 call by dialing an IP address directly.
Default value: ""
Gatekeeper: The system uses a Gatekeeper to make an H.323 call. When choosing this
Value space: String (0, 50) option, the H323 Gatekeeper Address must also be configured.

The authentication login name.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
127
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

H323 Encryption KeySize H323 H323Alias ID

Define the minimum or maximum key size for the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, Define the H.323 Alias ID, which is used to address the system on a H.323 Gatekeeper and
which is used when establishing the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption key. will be displayed in the call lists.

Requires user role: ADMIN Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Min1024bit Default value: ""

Value space: Min1024bit/Max1024bit/Min2048bit Value space: String (0, 49)

Min1024bit: The minimum size is 1024 bit. The H.323 Alias ID. Example: "[Link]@[Link]", "My H.323 Alias ID"
Max1024bit: The maximum size is 1024 bit.
Min2048bit: The minimum size is 2048 bit.
H323 NAT Mode
The firewall traversal technology creates a secure path through the firewall barrier, and
H323 Gatekeeper Address enables proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external video
conferencing system (when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router). NOTE: NAT does not
Define the IP address of the Gatekeeper. Requires H323 CallSetup Mode to be set to work in conjunction with gatekeepers.
Gatekeeper.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Default value: ""
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Value space: String (0, 255)
Auto: The system will determine if the H323 NAT Address or the real IP address should
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name. be used in signaling. This makes it possible to place calls to endpoints on the LAN as
well as endpoints on the WAN. If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, the real IP
address will be used.
H323 H323Alias E164 Off: The system will signal the real IP address.
The H.323 Alias E.164 defines the address of the system, according to the numbering plan On: The system will signal the configured H323 NAT Address instead of its real IP
implemented in the H.323 Gatekeeper. The E.164 alias is equivalent to a telephone number, address in Q.931 and H.245. The NAT server address will be shown in the startup-menu
sometimes combined with access codes. as: "My IP Address: [Link]". If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, H.323 calls
cannot be set up.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 30)

The H.323 Alias E.164 address. Valid characters are 0-9, * and #.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
128
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

H323 NAT Address

Define the external/global IP address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the
router will then be routed to the system. Note that NAT cannot be used when registered to
a gatekeeper.
In the router, the following ports must be routed to the system's IP address:
* Port 1720
* Port 5555-6555
* Port 2326-2487

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.

H323 PortAllocation
This setting affects the H.245 port numbers used for H.323 call signaling.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Dynamic

Value space: Dynamic/Static

Dynamic: The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.
The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls, as some
firewalls consider this as a sign of attack. When Dynamic is selected, the H.323 ports
used are from 11000 to 20999. Once 20999 is reached they restart again at 11000.
The ports are automatically selected by the system within the given range. Firewall
administrators should not try to deduce which ports are used when, as the allocation
schema within the mentioned range may change without any further notice.
Static: When set to Static the ports are given within a static predefined range [5555-
6555].

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
129
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Logging settings

Logging External Mode Logging External Server Port

Determine whether or not to use a remote syslog server for logging. The port that the remote syslog server listens for messages on. If set to 0, the video system
will use the standard syslog port. The standard syslog port is 514 for syslog, and 6514 for
Requires user role: ADMIN syslog over TLS.
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Off/On Default value: 514
Off: Disable logging to a remote syslog server.
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
On: Enable logging to a remote syslog server.
The number of the port that the remote syslog server is using. 0 means that the video
system uses the standard syslog port.
Logging External Protocol
Determine which protocol to use toward the remote logging server. You can use either the Logging Mode
syslog protocol over TLS (Transport Layer Security), or the syslog protocol in plaintext. For
details about the syslog protocol, see RFC 5424. Define the logging mode for the video system (syslog service). When disabled, the syslog
service does not start, and most of the event logs are not generated. The Historical Logs
Requires user role: ADMIN and Call Logs are not affected.
Default value: SyslogTLS Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Syslog/SyslogTLS Default value: On
Syslog: Syslog protocol in plain text. Value space: Off/On
SyslogTLS: Syslog protocol over TLS. Off: Disable the system logging service.
On: Enable the system logging service.
Logging External Server Address
The address of the remote syslog server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
130
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Macros settings

Macros Mode
Macros allow you to write snippets of JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video
endpoint, thus creating custom behavior. Use of macros is disabled by default, but the first
time you open the Macro Editor you will be asked whether to enable use of macros on the
codec. Use this setting when you want to manually enable, or to permanently disable the
use of macros on the codec. You can disable the use of macros within the Macro Editor.
But this will not permanently disable macros from running, because every time the codec is
reset the macros will be re-enabled automatically.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Permanently disable the use of macros on this video system.
On: Enable the use of macros on this video system.

Macros AutoStart
All the macros run in a single process on the video endpoint, called the macro runtime. It
should be running by default, but you can choose to stop and start it manually. If you restart
the video system, the runtime will automatically start again if auto start is enabled.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The macro runtime will not start automatically after a restart of the video system.
On: The macro runtime will start automatically after a restart of the video system.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
131
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Network settings

Network [1..1] DNS DNSSEC Mode Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Mode

Domain Name System Security extensions (DNSSEC) is a set of extensions to DNS. It is The system can be connected to an IEEE 802.1X LAN network, with a port-based network
used to authenticate DNS replies for zones that are signed. It will still allow unsigned zones. access control that is used to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks.

Requires user role: ADMIN Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Off Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable Domain Name System Security Extensions. Off: The 802.1X authentication is disabled.
On: Enable Domain Name System Security Extensions. On: The 802.1X authentication is enabled.

Network [1..1] DNS Domain Name Network [1..1] IEEE8021X TlsVerify

The DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified Verification of the server-side certificate of an IEEE802.1x connection against the
names. certificates in the local CA-list when TLS is used. The CA-list must be uploaded to the
Example: If the DNS Domain Name is "[Link]" and the name to lookup is video system. This can be done from the web interface.
"MyVideoSystem", this will result in the DNS lookup "[Link]". This setting takes effect only when Network [1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls is enabled (On).

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "" Default value: Off

Value space: String (0, 64) Value space: Off/On

The DNS domain name. Off: When set to Off, TLS connections are allowed without verifying the server-side
X.509 certificate against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no CA-list
has been uploaded to the codec.
Network [1..1] DNS Server [1..3] Address On: When set to On, the server-side X.509 certificate will be validated against the local
CA-list for all TLS connections. Only servers with a valid certificate will be allowed.
Define the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to three addresses may be specified.
If the network addresses are unknown, contact your administrator or Internet Service
Provider.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
132
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Network [1..1] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate Network [1..1] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity

Authentication using a private key/certificate pair during an IEEE802.1x connection. The The 802.1X Anonymous ID string is to be used as unencrypted identity with EAP (Extensible
authentication X.509 certificate must be uploaded to the video system. This can be done Authentication Protocol) types that support different tunneled identity, like EAP-PEAP and
from the web interface. EAP-TTLS. If set, the anonymous ID will be used for the initial (unencrypted) EAP Identity
Request.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Off Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On
Off: When set to Off client-side authentication is not used (only server-side). Value space: String (0, 64)
On: When set to On the client (video system) will perform a mutual authentication TLS The 802.1X Anonymous ID string.
handshake with the server.

Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Md5

Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Identity Define the Md5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) mode. This is a Challenge Handshake
Define the user name for 802.1X authentication. Authentication Protocol that relies on a shared secret. Md5 is a Weak security.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "" Default value: On

Value space: String (0, 64) Value space: Off/On

The user name for 802.1X authentication. Off: The EAP-MD5 protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-MD5 protocol is enabled.

Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Password

Define the password for 802.1X authentication.
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls
Define the TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) mode. Authenticates LAN clients
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER without the need for client certificates. Developed by Funk Software and Certicom. Usually
Default value: "" supported by Agere Systems, Proxim and Avaya.

Value space: String (0, 50) Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The password for 802.1X authentication. Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The EAP-TTLS protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-TTLS protocol is enabled.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
133
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls Network [1..1] IPv4 Assignment

Enable or disable the use of EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) for IEEE802.1x Define how the system will obtain its IPv4 address, subnet mask and gateway address. This
connections. The EAP-TLS protocol, defined in RFC 5216, is considered one of the most setting applies only to systems on IPv4 networks.
secure EAP standards. LAN clients are authenticated using client certificates.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Default value: DHCP
Default value: On
Value space: Static/DHCP
Value space: Off/On Static: The addresses must be configured manually using the Network IPv4 Address,
Off: The EAP-TLS protocol is disabled. Network IPv4 Gateway and Network IPv4 SubnetMask settings (static addresses).
On: The EAP-TLS protocol is enabled. DHCP: The system addresses are automatically assigned by the DHCP server.

Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Peap Network [1..1] IPv4 Address

Define the Peap (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) mode. Authenticates LAN Define the static IPv4 network address for the system. Applicable only when Network IPv4
clients without the need for client certificates. Developed by Microsoft, Cisco and RSA Assignment is set to Static.
Security.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Default value: ""
Default value: On
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Off/On A valid IPv4 address.
Off: The EAP-PEAP protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-PEAP protocol is enabled.
Network [1..1] IPv4 Gateway
Define the IPv4 network gateway address. Applicable only when the Network IPv4
Network [1..1] IPStack Assignment is set to Static.
Select if the system should use IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack, on the network interface. NOTE:
After changing this setting you may have to wait up to 30 seconds before it takes effect. Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Dual Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address.
Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6
Dual: When set to Dual, the network interface can operate on both IP versions at the
same time, and can have both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address at the same time.
IPv4: When set to IPv4, the system will use IPv4 on the network interface.
IPv6: When set to IPv6, the system will use IPv6 on the network interface.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
134
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Network [1..1] IPv4 SubnetMask Network [1..1] IPv6 Gateway

Define the IPv4 network subnet mask. Applicable only when the Network IPv4 Assignment Define the IPv6 network gateway address. This setting is only applicable when the Network
is set to Static. IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "" Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64) Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address. A valid IPv6 address.

Network [1..1] IPv6 Assignment Network [1..1] IPv6 DHCPOptions

Define how the system will obtain its IPv6 address and the default gateway address. This Retrieve a set of DHCP options, for example NTP and DNS server addresses, from a
setting applies only to systems on IPv6 networks. DHCPv6 server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Autoconf Default value: On

Value space: Static/DHCPv6/Autoconf Value space: Off/On

Static: The codec and gateway IP addresses must be configured manually using the Off: Disable the retrieval of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
Network IPv6 Address and Network IPv6 Gateway settings. The options, for example On: Enable the retrieval of a selected set of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
NTP and DNS server addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6
server. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
DHCPv6: All IPv6 addresses, including options, will be obtained from a DHCPv6 server. Network [1..1] MTU
See RFC 3315 for a detailed description. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting will be
ignored. Define the Ethernet MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) size. The MTU size must be
supported by your network infrastructure. The minimum size is 576 for IPv4 and 1280 for
Autoconf: Enable IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration of the IPv6 network interface. See
IPv6.
RFC 4862 for a detailed description. The options, for example NTP and DNS server
addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6 server. The Network
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
Default value: 1500

Value space: Integer (576..1500)

Network [1..1] IPv6 Address
Set a value for the MTU (bytes).
Define the static IPv6 network address for the system. Applicable only when the Network
IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv6 address including a network mask. Example: [Link]/48

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
135
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Network [1..1] QoS Mode Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Video

The QoS (Quality of Service) is a method which handles the priority of audio, video and This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
data in the network. The QoS settings must be supported by the infrastructure. Diffserv Define which priority Video packets should have in the IP network. The packets on the
(Differentiated Services) is a computer networking architecture that specifies a simple, presentation channel (shared content) are also in the Video packet category. The priority
scalable and coarse-grained mechanism for classifying, managing network traffic and for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The
providing QoS priorities on modern IP networks. recommended class for Video is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in doubt,
contact your network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
Default value: Diffserv by the local network administrator.
Value space: Off/Diffserv Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Off: No QoS method is used. Default value: 0
Diffserv: When you set the QoS Mode to Diffserv, the Network QoS Diffserv Audio,
Network QoS Diffserv Video, Network QoS Diffserv Data, Network QoS Diffserv Value space: Integer (0..63)
Signalling, Network QoS Diffserv ICMPv6 and Network QoS Diffserv NTP settings are Set the priority of the video packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
used to prioritize packets. higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Audio Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Data
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv. This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Audio packets should have in the IP network. Define which priority Data packets should have in the IP network.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended class for Audio is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in priority. The recommended value for Data is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt, contact
doubt, contact your network administrator. your network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator. by the local network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 0 Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..63) Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the audio packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the Set the priority of the data packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort". the priority. 0 means "best effort".

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
136
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Signalling Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv NTP
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv. This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Signalling packets that are deemed critical (time-sensitive) for the Define which priority NTP packets should have in the IP network.
real-time operation should have in the IP network. The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The recommended value for NTP is 0, which means "best effort". If in doubt,
priority. The recommended class for Signalling is CS3, which equals the decimal value 24. If contact your network administrator.
in doubt, contact your network administrator. The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.
by the local network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Default value: 0
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Value space: Integer (0..63) Set the priority of the NTP packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher
Set the priority of the signalling packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the the priority. 0 means "best effort".
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

Network [1..1] RemoteAccess Allow

Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6 Define which IP addresses (IPv4/IPv6) are allowed for remote access to the codec from
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv. SSH/Telnet/HTTP/HTTPS. Multiple IP addresses are separated by a white space.
Define which priority ICMPv6 packets should have in the IP network. A network mask (IP range) is specified by <ip address>/N, where N is 1-32 for IPv4, and N
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the is 1-128 for IPv6. The /N is a common indication of a network mask where the first N bits
priority. The recommended value for ICMPv6 is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt, are set. Thus [Link]/24 would match any address starting with 192.168.0, since these
contact your network administrator. are the first 24 bits in the address.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
by the local network administrator.
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: 0
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the ICMPv6 packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
137
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Network [1..1] Speed Network [1..1] VLAN Voice Mode

Define the Ethernet link speed. We recommend not to change from the default value, Define the VLAN voice mode. The VLAN Voice Mode will be set to Auto automatically if you
which negotiates with the network to set the speed automatically. If you do not use auto- have Cisco UCM (Cisco Unified Communications Manager) as provisioning infrastructure.
negotiation, make sure that the speed you choose is supported by the closest switch in Note that Auto mode will NOT work if the NetworkServices CDP Mode setting is Off.
your network infrastructure.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: Auto
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Manual/Off
Value space: Auto/10half/10full/100half/100full/1000full Auto: The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), if available, assigns an id to the voice VLAN. If
Auto: Auto-negotiate link speed. CDP is not available, VLAN is not enabled.
10half: Force link to 10 Mbps half-duplex. Manual: The VLAN ID is set manually using the Network VLAN Voice VlanId setting. If
10full: Force link to 10 Mbps full-duplex. CDP is available, the manually set value will be overruled by the value assigned by CDP.
100half: Force link to 100 Mbps half-duplex. Off: VLAN is not enabled.
100full: Force link to 100 Mbps full-duplex.
1000full: Force link to 1 Gbps full-duplex. Network [1..1] VLAN Voice VlanId
Define the VLAN voice ID. This setting will only take effect if Network VLAN Voice Mode is
Network [1..1] TrafficControl Mode set to Manual.

Define the network traffic control mode to decide how to control the video packets Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
transmission speed. Default value: 1
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Value space: Integer (1..4094)
Default value: On Set the VLAN voice ID.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Transmit video packets at link speed.
On: Transmit video packets at maximum 20 Mbps. Can be used to smooth out bursts in
the outgoing network traffic.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
138
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

NetworkServices settings

NetworkServices CDP Mode NetworkServices HTTP Mode

Enable or disable the CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) daemon. Enabling CDP will make the Define whether or not to allow access to the video system using the HTTP or HTTPS (HTTP
endpoint report certain statistics and device identifiers to a CDP-enabled switch. If CDP is Secure) protocols. Note that the video system's web interface use HTTP or HTTPS. If this
disabled, the Network VLAN Voice Mode: Auto setting will not work. setting is switched Off, you cannot use the web interface.
For additional security (encryption and decryption of requests and pages that are returned
Requires user role: ADMIN by the web server), allow only HTTPS.
Default value: On Note: The default value is HTTP+HTTPS for video systems that have been upgraded to
CE9.4 (or later) from an earlier software version, provided that the video system has not
Value space: Off/On
been factory reset after the upgrade.
Off: The CDP daemon is disabled.
On: The CDP daemon is enabled. Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: HTTPS (changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS in CE9.4)

NetworkServices H323 Mode Value space: Off/HTTP+HTTPS/HTTPS

Off: Access to the video system not allowed via HTTP or HTTPS.
Define whether the system should be able to place and receive H.323 calls or not.
HTTP+HTTPS: Access to the video system allowed via both HTTP and HTTPS.
Requires user role: ADMIN HTTPS: Access to the video system allowed via HTTPS, but not via HTTP.
Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName

Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.
This is the user name part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls. Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 80)

The authentication login name.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
139
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl

This is the password part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy. Set the URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script. Requires that the
Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual. NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to PACUrl.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "" Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64) Value space: String (0..255)

The authentication password. The URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script.

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion

The HTTP proxy for Cisco Webex can be set up manually, it can be auto-configured Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
(PACUrl), fully automated (WPAD), or it can be turned off.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Default value: TLSv1.1
Default value: Off
Value space: TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD TLSv1.1: Support of TLS version 1.1 or higher.
Manual: Enter the address of the proxy server in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy TLSv1.2: Support of TLS version 1.2 or higher.
URL setting. Optionally, also add the HTTP proxy login name and password in the
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName/Password settings.
Off: The HTTP proxy mode is turned off. NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity
PACUrl: The HTTP proxy is auto-configured. You must enter the URL for the PAC (Proxy
The HTTP Strict Transport Security header lets a web site inform the browser that it should
Auto Configuration) script in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl setting.
never load the site using HTTP and should automatically convert all attempts to access the
WPAD: With WPAD (Web Proxy Auto Discovery) the HTTP proxy is fully automated and site using HTTP to HTTPS requests instead.
auto-configured.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url
Value space: Off/On
Set the URL of the HTTP proxy server. Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy
Mode is set to Manual. Off: The HTTP strict transport security feature is disabled.
On: The HTTP strict transport security feature is enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The URL of the HTTP proxy server.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
140
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode

When the video system connects to an external HTTPS server (like a phone book server Define the support for OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) responder services. The
or an external manager), this server will present a certificate to the video system to identify OCSP feature allows users to enable OCSP instead of certificate revocation lists (CRLs) to
itself. check the certificate status.
For any outgoing HTTPS connection, the OCSP responder is queried of the status. If the
Requires user role: ADMIN corresponding certificate has been revoked, then the HTTPS connection will not be used.
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Off/On Default value: Off
Off: Do not verify server certificates.
On: Requires the system to verify that the server certificate is signed by a trusted Value space: Off/On
Certificate Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the Off: Disable OCSP support.
system in advance. On: Enable OCSP support.

NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL

When the video system connects to a HTTPS client (like a web browser), the client can be Define the URL of the OCSP responder (server) that will be used to check the certificate
asked to present a certificate to the video system to identify itself. status.
Requires user role: ADMIN Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On Value space: String (0..255)
Off: Do not verify client certificates. A valid URL.
On: Requires the client to present a certificate that is signed by a trusted Certificate
Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the system in
advance.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
141
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

NetworkServices NTP Mode NetworkServices SNMP Mode

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the system's time and date to a SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used in network management systems
reference time server. The time server will be queried regularly for time updates. to monitor network-attached devices (routers, servers, switches, projectors, etc) for
conditions that warrant administrative attention. SNMP exposes management data in the
Requires user role: ADMIN form of variables on the managed systems, which describe the system configuration. These
Default value: Auto variables can then be queried (set to ReadOnly) and sometimes set (set to ReadWrite) by
managing applications.
Value space: Auto/Manual/Off
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Auto: The system will use an NTP server for time reference. As default, the server
address will be obtained from the network's DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not used, Default value: ReadOnly
or if the DHCP server does not provide an NTP server address, the NTP server address
that is specified in the NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address setting will be used. Value space: Off/ReadOnly/ReadWrite
Manual: The system will use the NTP server that is specified in the NetworkServices Off: Disable the SNMP network service.
NTP Server [n] Address setting for time reference. ReadOnly: Enable the SNMP network service for queries only.
Off: The system will not use an NTP server. The NetworkServices NTP Server [n] ReadWrite: Enable the SNMP network service for both queries and commands.
Address setting will be ignored.

NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address

NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] Address Define the address of up to three SNMP Managers.
The address of the NTP server that will be used when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to The system's SNMP Agent (in the codec) responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC
Manual, and when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to Auto and no address is supplied by program etc.), for example about system location and system contact. SNMP traps are not
a DHCP server. supported.
Requires user role: ADMIN Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: "[Link]" Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 255) Value space: String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name. A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

NetworkServices SIP Mode

Define whether the system should be able to place and receive SIP calls or not.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
142
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName NetworkServices SSH Mode

Define the name of the Network Services SNMP Community. SNMP Community names SSH (or Secure Shell) protocol can provide secure encrypted communication between the
are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a password (case codec and your local computer.
sensitive) in order to receive a response from the SNMP Agent in the codec. The default
password is "public". If you have the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite (TMS) you Requires user role: ADMIN
must make sure the same SNMP Community is configured there too. NOTE: The SNMP Default value: On
Community password is case sensitive.
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Off: The SSH protocol is disabled.
Default value: ""
On: The SSH protocol is enabled.
Value space: String (0, 50)
The SNMP community name.
NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey
Secure Shell (SSH) public key authentication can be used to access the codec.
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Contact.
Default value: On
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Off/On
Default value: ""
Off: The SSH public key is not allowed.
Value space: String (0, 50) On: The SSH public key is allowed.
The name of the SNMP system contact.

NetworkServices Telnet Mode

NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation Telnet is a network protocol used on the Internet or Local Area Network (LAN) connections.
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Location.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: Off
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On
Value space: String (0, 50) Off: The Telnet protocol is disabled. This is the factory setting.
The name of the SNMP system location. On: The Telnet protocol is enabled.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
143
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

NetworkServices UPnP Mode NetworkServices WelcomeText

Fully disable UPnP (Universal Plug and Play), or enable UPnP for a short time period after Choose which information the user should see when logging on to the codec through
the video system has been switched on or restarted. Telnet/SSH.
The default operation is that UPnP is enabled when you switch on or restart the video
system. Then UPnP is automatically disabled after the timeout period that is defined in the Requires user role: ADMIN
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout setting. Use the video system’s web interface to set the Default value: On
timeout.
Value space: Off/On
When UPnP is enabled, the video system advertises its presence on the network. The
advertisement permits a Touch controller to discover video systems automatically, and Off: The welcome text is: Login successful
you do not need to manually enter the video system's IP address in order to pair the Touch On: The welcome text is: Welcome to <system name>; Software version; Software
controller. release date; Login successful.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode
Value space: Off/On Enable or disable the video system's XML API. For security reasons this may be disabled.
Disabling the XML API will limit the remote manageability with for example TMS, which no
Off: UPnP is disabled. The video system does not advertise its presence, and you have
longer will be able to connect to the video system.
to enter the video system's IP address manually in order to pair a Touch controller to the
video system.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: UPnP is enabled. The video system advertises its presence until the timeout period
Default value: On
expires.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The XML API is disabled.
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout
On: The XML API is enabled.
Define for how many seconds UPnP shall stay enabled after the video system is switched
on or restarted. The NetworkServices UPnP Mode setting must be On for this setting to
take any effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 600

Value space: Integer (0..3600)

Range: Select a value between 0 and 3600 seconds.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
144
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Peripherals settings

Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience Peripherals Profile Cameras

If the Touch controller is used in environments with considerable amounts of Define the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the video system.
electromagnetic noise present, you may experience an appearance of false signals—for This information is used by the video system's diagnostics service. If the number of
example as if someone tapped the Touch controller when obviously nobody did so. To cope connected cameras does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an
with this you may enable the EMC Resilience Mode. inconsistency.

Requires user role: ADMIN Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Off Default value: Minimum1

Value space: Off/On Value space: NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7

Off: The EMC resilience is disabled. NotSet: No camera check is performed.
On: The EMC resilience is enabled. Minimum1: At least one camera should be connected to the video system.
0-7: Select the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the video
system.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing
In order to use Cisco Touch 10 (touch panel) as user interface for the video system, Touch
10 must be either directly connected to the video system or paired to the video system via Peripherals Profile ControlSystems
LAN. The latter is referred to as remote pairing. Define if a third-party control system, for example Crestron or AMX, is expected to be
Remote pairing is allowed by default; you must switch this setting Off if you want to prevent connected to the video system. This information is used by the video system's diagnostics
remote pairing. service. If the number of connected control systems does not match this setting, the
diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency. Note that only one third-party control
Requires user role: ADMIN system is supported.
Default value: On If set to 1, the control system must send heart beats to the video system using xCommand
Peripherals Pair and HeartBeat commands. Failing to do so will cause the in-room control
Value space: Off/On extensions to show a warning that the video system has lost connectivity to the control
Off: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is not allowed. system.
On: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is allowed.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: NotSet

Value space: 1/NotSet

1: One third-party control system should be connected to the video system.
NotSet: No check for a third-party control system is performed.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
145
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Peripherals Profile TouchPanels

Define the number of Cisco Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the
video system. This information is used by the video system's diagnostics service. If the
number of connected Touch controllers does not match this setting, the diagnostics service
will report it as an inconsistency.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Minimum1

Value space: NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5

NotSet: No touch panel check is performed.
Minimum1: At least one Cisco Touch controller should be connected to the video system.
0-5: Select the number of Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the
video system. Note that only one Cisco Touch controller is officially supported.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
146
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Phonebook settings

Phonebook Server [1..1] ID

Define a name for the external phone book.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

The name for the external phone book.

Phonebook Server [1..1] Type

Select the phonebook server type.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/CUCM/Spark/TMS/VCS

Off: Do not use a phonebook.
CUCM: The phonebook is located on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Spark: The phonebook is located in the Cisco Webex cloud.
TMS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite server.
VCS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication
Server.

Phonebook Server [1..1] URL

Define the address (URL) to the external phone book server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid address (URL) to the phone book server.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
147
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Provisioning settings

Provisioning Connectivity Provisioning Mode

This setting controls how the device discovers whether it should request an internal or It is possible to configure a video system using a provisioning system (external manager).
external configuration from the provisioning server. This allows video conferencing network administrators to manage many video systems
simultaneously. With this setting you choose which type of provisioning system to
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER use. Provisioning can also be switched off. Contact your provisioning system provider/
Default value: Auto representative for more information.

Value space: Internal/External/Auto Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Internal: Request internal configuration. Default value: Auto
External: Request external configuration. Value space: Off/Auto/CUCM/Edge/Spark/TMS/VCS
Auto: Automatically discover using NAPTR queries whether internal or external Off: The video system is not configured by a provisioning system.
configurations should be requested. If the NAPTR responses have the "e" flag, external
configurations will be requested. Otherwise internal configurations will be requested. Auto: The provisioning server is automatically selected as set up in the DHCP server.
CUCM: Push configurations to the video system from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager).
Edge: Push configurations to the video system from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager). The system connects to CUCM via the Collaboration Edge
infrastructure. In order to register over Edge the encryption option key must be installed
on the video system.
Spark: Push configurations to the video system from the Cisco Webex cloud service.
TMS: Push configurations to the video system from TMS (Cisco TelePresence
Management System).
VCS: Push configurations to the video system from VCS (Cisco TelePresence Video
Communication Server).

Provisioning LoginName
This is the username part of the credentials used to authenticate the video system with the
provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 80)

A valid username.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
148
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Provisioning Password Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress

This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate the video system with the Only applicable when the endpoint is provisioned by Cisco Unified Communication Manager
provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server. (CUCM) and an alternate CUCM is available for redundancy. Define the address of the
alternate CUCM. If the main CUCM is not available, the endpoint will be provisioned by the
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER alternate CUCM. When the main CUCM is available again, the endpoint will be provisioned
Default value: "" by this CUCM.

Value space: String (0, 64) Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
A valid password. Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

Provisioning RoomType ClassroomEnabled A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

Not applicable in this release.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol
Default value: False Define whether to use the HTTP (unsecure communication) or HTTPS (secure
communication) protocol when sending requests to the external manager / provisioning
Value space: False/True system.
A valid password. The selected protocol must be enabled in the NetworkServices HTTP Mode setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Provisioning ExternalManager Address Default value: HTTP

Define the IP Address or DNS name of the external manager / provisioning system. Value space: HTTPS/HTTP
If an External Manager Address (and Path) is configured, the system will send a message HTTPS: Send requests via HTTPS.
to this address when starting up. When receiving this message the external manager /
HTTP: Send requests via HTTP.
provisioning system can return configurations/commands to the unit as a result.
When using CUCM or TMS provisioning, the DHCP server can be set up to provide the
external manager address automatically (DHCP Option 242 for TMS, and DHCP Option Provisioning ExternalManager Path
150 for CUCM). An address set in the Provisioning ExternalManager Address setting will
override the address provided by DHCP. Define the Path to the external manager / provisioning system. This setting is required
when several management services reside on the same server, i.e. share the same External
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Manager address.
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0, 64) Default value: ""
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Value space: String (0..255)
A valid path to the external manager or provisioning system.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
149
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Provisioning ExternalManager Domain

Define the SIP domain for the VCS provisioning server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid domain name.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
150
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Proximity settings

Proximity Mode Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients

Determine whether the video system will emit ultrasound pairing messages or not. Enable or disable content sharing from Proximity clients. When this setting is enabled, you
When the video system emits ultrasound, Proximity clients can detect that they are close can share content from a Proximity client wirelessly on the video system, e.g. share your
to the video system. In order to use a client, at least one of the Proximity services must be laptop screen. This service is supported by laptops (OS X and Windows). Proximity Mode
enabled (refer to the Proximity Services settings). In general, Cisco recommends enabling must be On for this setting to take any effect.
all the Proximity services.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Default value: Enabled
Default value: Off
Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Value space: Off/On Enabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is enabled.
Off: The video system does not emit ultrasound, and Proximity services cannot be used. Disabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is disabled.
On: The video system emits ultrasound, and Proximity clients can detect that they are
close to the video system. Enabled Proximity services can be used.
Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients
Enable or disable content sharing to Proximity clients. When enabled, Proximity clients will
Proximity Services CallControl receive the presentation from the video system. You can zoom in on details, view previous
Enable or disable basic call control features on Proximity clients. When this setting is content and take snapshots. This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).
enabled, you are able to control a call using a Proximity client (for example dial, mute, Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
adjust volume and hang up). This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).
Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect. Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Disabled
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Disabled Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Enabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is enabled.
Value space: Enabled/Disabled Disabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is disabled.
Enabled: Call control from a Proximity client is enabled.
Disabled: Call control from a Proximity client is disabled.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
151
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

RoomAnalytics settings

RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector
The video system has the capability to find whether or not people are present in the room,
and report the result in the RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence status. This feature is based on
ultrasound. It takes a minimum of 2 minutes to detect whether people are present or not in
the room, and it may take up to 2 minutes for the status to change after the room becomes
vacant.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The video system's status does not show whether or not there are people present in
the room.
On: The video system's status shows whether or not there are people present in the
room.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
152
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

RTP settings

RTP Ports Range Start RTP Video Ports Range Start

Define the first port in the range of RTP ports. Define the first port in the range of RTP video ports.
As default, the system is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2486 for RTP and RTCP If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To
media data. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled, and 20 enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between
when RTP Video Ports Range is enabled. 1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap. Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls. A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 2326 Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (1024..65438) Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65454)

Set the first port in the range of RTP ports. Set the first port in the range of RTP video ports.

RTP Ports Range Stop RTP Video Ports Range Stop

Define the last port in the range of RTP ports. Define the last port in the range of RTP video ports.
As default, the system is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2487 for RTP and RTCP If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To
media data. If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled the system is using the ports in the enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between
range 1024 to 65436. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled, 1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.
and 20 when RTP Video Ports Range is enabled. If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap. A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN Default value: 0
Default value: 2486
Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65535)
Value space: Integer (1120..65535) Set the last port in the range of RTP video ports.
Set the last port in the range of RTP ports.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
153
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Security settings

Security Audit Logging Mode Security Audit OnError Action

Define where to record or transmit the audit logs. The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define what happens when the connection to the syslog server is lost. This setting is only
When using the External/ExternalSecure modes and setting the port assignment to manual relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to ExternalSecure.
in the Security Audit Server PortAssignment setting, you must also enter the address and
port number for the audit server in the Security Audit Server Address and Security Audit Requires user role: AUDIT
Server Port settings. Default value: Ignore

Requires user role: AUDIT Value space: Halt/Ignore

Default value: Internal Halt: If a halt condition is detected the system codec is rebooted and only the auditor is
allowed to operate the unit until the halt condition has passed. When the halt condition
Value space: Off/Internal/External/ExternalSecure has passed the audit logs are re-spooled to the syslog server. Halt conditions are: A
Off: No audit logging is performed. network breach (no physical link), no syslog server running (or incorrect address or port
to the syslog server), TLS authentication failed (if in use), local backup (re-spooling) log
Internal: The system records the audit logs to internal logs, and rotates logs when they full.
are full.
Ignore: The system will continue its normal operation, and rotate internal logs when full.
External: The system sends the audit logs to an external syslog server. The syslog server When the connection is restored it will again send its audit logs to the syslog server.
must support UDP.
ExternalSecure: The system sends encrypted audit logs to an external syslog server that
is verified by a certificate in the Audit CA list. The Audit CA list file must be uploaded to
the codec using the web interface. The common_name parameter of a certificate in the
Security Audit Server Address
CA list must match the IP address of the syslog server, and the secure TCP server must The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define the IP address of the syslog server.
be set up to listen for secure (TLS) TCP Syslog messages. Only valid IPv4 or IPv6 address formats are accepted. Host names are not supported.
This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to External or
ExternalSecure.

Requires user role: AUDIT

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
154
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Security Audit Server Port Security Session InactivityTimeout

The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define the port of the syslog server that the Define how long the system will accept inactivity from the user before he is automatically
system shall send its audit logs to. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Server logged out from a web, Telnet, or SSH session.
PortAssignment is set to Manual. Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.
Requires user role: AUDIT Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 514 Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..65535) Value space: Integer (0..10000)
Set the audit server port. Set the inactivity timeout (minutes); or select 0 when inactivity should not enforce
automatic logout.

Security Audit Server PortAssignment

The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. You can define how the port number of the Security Session MaxFailedLogins
external syslog server will be assigned. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Define the maximum number of failed login attempts per user for a web or SSH session. If
Logging Mode is set to External or ExternalSecure. To see which port number is used you the user exceeded the maximum number of attempts the user will be locked out. 0 means
can check the Security Audit Server Port status. Navigate to Setup > Status on the web that there is no limit for failed logins.
interface or; if on a command line interface, run the command xStatus Security Audit Server
Port. Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.

Requires user role: AUDIT Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto Default value: 0

Value space: Auto/Manual Value space: Integer (0..10)

Auto: Will use UDP port number 514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to Set the maximum number of failed login attempts per user.
External. Will use TCP port number 6514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to
ExternalSecure.
Manual: Will use the port value defined in the Security Audit Server Port setting.
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user is 20 sessions.

Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 20
Define how long the system will lock out a user after failed login to a web or SSH session.
Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect. Value space: Integer (1..20)
Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 60

Value space: Integer (0..10000)

Set the lockout time (minutes).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
155
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Security Session MaxTotalSessions

The maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total is 20 sessions.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 20

Value space: Integer (1..20)

Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total.

Security Session ShowLastLogon

When logging in to the system using SSH or Telnet you will see the UserId, time and date of
the last session that did a successful login.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

On: Show information about the last session.
Off: Do not show information about the last session.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
156
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

SerialPort settings

SerialPort Mode
Enable/disable the serial port.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the serial port.
On: Enable the serial port.

SerialPort BaudRate
Set the baud rate (data transmission rate, bits per second) for the serial port.
Other connection parameters for the serial port are: Data bits: 8; Parity: None; Stop bits: 1;
Flow control: None.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 115200

Value space: 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Choose a baud rate from the baud rates listed (bps).

SerialPort LoginRequired
Define if login shall be required when connecting to the serial port.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The user can access the codec via the serial port without any login.
On: Login is required when connecting to the codec via the serial port.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
157
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

SIP settings

SIP ANAT SIP DefaultTransport

ANAT (Alternative Network Address Types) enables media negotiation for multiple Select the transport protocol to be used over the LAN.
addresses and address types, as specified in RFC 4091.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN Default value: Auto
Default value: Off
Value space: Auto/TCP/Tls/UDP
Value space: Off/On TCP: The system will always use TCP as the default transport method.
Off: Disable ANAT. UDP: The system will always use UDP as the default transport method.
On: Enable ANAT. Tls: The system will always use TLS as the default transport method. For TLS
connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the video system. If no such CA-list is
available on the system then anonymous Diffie Hellman will be used.
SIP Authentication UserName Auto: The system will try to connect using transport protocols in the following order: TLS,
This is the user name part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy. TCP, UDP.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: "" SIP DisplayName
When configured the incoming call will report the display name instead of the SIP URI.
Value space: String (0, 128)
A valid username. Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""

SIP Authentication Password Value space: String (0, 550)

This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy. The name to be displayed instead of the SIP URI.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 128)

A valid password.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
158
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

SIP Ice Mode SIP Line

ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment, RFC 5245) is a NAT traversal solution that the When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) the endpoint may be
video systems can use to discover the optimized media path. Thus the shortest route for part of a shared line. This means that several devices share the same directory number. The
audio and video is always secured between the video systems. different devices sharing the same number receive status from the other appearances on
the line as defined in RFC 4235.
Requires user role: ADMIN Note that shared lines are set up by CUCM, not by the endpoint. Therefore do not change
Default value: Auto this setting manually; CUCM pushes this information to the endpoint when required.

Value space: Auto/Off/On Requires user role: ADMIN

Auto: ICE is enabled if a TURN server is provided, otherwise ICE is disabled. Default value: Private
Off: ICE is disabled.
Value space: Private/Shared
On: ICE is enabled.
Shared: The system is part of a shared line and is therefore sharing its directory number
with other devices.
SIP Ice DefaultCandidate Private: This system is not part of a shared line.

The ICE protocol needs some time to reach a conclusion about which media route to use
(up to the first 5 seconds of a call). During this period media for the video system will be
sent to the Default Candidate as defined in this setting.
SIP ListenPort
Turn on or off the listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports. If turned
Requires user role: ADMIN off, the endpoint will only be reachable through the SIP registrar (CUCM or VCS).
Default value: Host
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Host/Rflx/Relay Default value: On
Host: Send media to the video system's private IP address.
Value space: Off/On
Rflx: Send media to the video system's public IP address, as seen by the TURN server.
Off: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned off.
Relay: Send media to the IP address and port allocated on the TURN server.
On: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned on.

SIP Mailbox
When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) you may be offered
the option of having a private voice mailbox.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 255)

A valid number or address. Leave the string empty if you do not have a voice mailbox.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
159
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

SIP MinimumTLSVersion SIP Proxy [1..4] Address

Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed. The Proxy Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy. It is possible
to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP and
Requires user role: ADMIN UDP but another one can be provided.
Default value: TLSv1.0
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2 Default value: ""
TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.
Value space: String (0..255)
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.

SIP PreferredIPMedia SIP TlsVerify

For TLS connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the video system. This can be done
Define the preferred IP version for sending and receiving media (audio, video, data). Only from the web interface.
applicable when both Network IPStack and Conference CallProtocolIPStack are set to Dual,
and the network does not have a mechanism for choosing the preferred IP version. Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN Default value: Off
Default value: IPv4 Value space: Off/On
Value space: IPv4/IPv6 Off: Set to Off to allow TLS connections without verifying them. The TLS connections
are allowed to be set up without verifying the x.509 certificate received from the server
IPv4: The preferred IP version for media is IPv4. against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no SIP CA-list has been
IPv6: The preferred IP version for media is IPv6. uploaded.
On: Set to On to verify TLS connections. Only TLS connections to servers, whose x.509
certificate is validated against the CA-list, will be allowed.
SIP PreferredIPSignaling
Define the preferred IP version for signaling (audio, video, data). Only applicable when both
Network IPStack and Conference CallProtocolIPStack are set to Dual, and the network does SIP Turn DiscoverMode
not have a mechanism for choosing the preferred IP version. It also determines the priority Define the discover mode to enable/disable the application to search for available Turn
of the A/AAAA lookups in DNS, so that the preferred IP version is used for registration. servers in DNS. Before making calls, the system will test if port allocation is possible.
Requires user role: ADMIN Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: IPv4 Default value: On
Value space: IPv4/IPv6 Value space: Off/On
IPv4: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv4. Off: Set to Off to disable discovery mode.
IPv6: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv6. On: When set to On, the system will search for available Turn servers in DNS, and before
making calls the system will test if port allocation is possible.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
160
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

SIP Turn DropRflx SIP Turn Password

DropRflx will make the endpoint force media through the Turn relay, unless the remote Define the password needed for accessing the TURN server.
endpoint is on the same network.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN Default value: ""
Default value: Off
Value space: String (0, 128)
Value space: Off/On A valid password.
Off: Disable DropRflx.
On: The system will force media through the Turn relay when the remote endpoint is on
another network. SIP Type
Enables SIP extensions and special behavior for a vendor or provider.

SIP Turn Server Requires user role: ADMIN

Define the address of the TURN (Traversal Using Relay NAT) server. It is used as a media Default value: Standard
relay fallback and it is also used to discover the endpoint's own public IP address.
Value space: Standard/Cisco
Requires user role: ADMIN Standard: Use this when registering to standard SIP Proxy (tested with Cisco
Default value: "" TelePresence VCS).
Cisco: Use this when registering to Cisco Unified Communication Manager.
Value space: String (0..255)
The preferred format is DNS SRV record (e.g. _turn._udp.<domain>), or it can be a valid
IPv4 or IPv6 address. SIP URI
The SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) is the address that is used to identify the video
SIP Turn UserName system. The URI is registered and used by the SIP services to route inbound calls to the
system. The SIP URI syntax is defined in RFC 3261.
Define the user name needed for accessing the TURN server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN Default value: ""
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0..255)
Value space: String (0, 128) An address (URI) that is compliant with the SIP URI syntax.
A valid user name.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
161
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Standby settings

Standby Control Standby StandbyAction

Define whether the system should go into standby mode or not. Define the camera position when going into standby mode.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On Default value: PrivacyPosition

Value space: Off/On Value space: None/PrivacyPosition

Off: The system will not enter standby mode. None: No action.
On: The system will enter standby mode when the Standby Delay has timed out. PrivacyPosition: When the video system enters standby, the camera turns to a sideways
Requires the Standby Delay to be set to an appropriate value. position for privacy.

Standby Delay Standby WakeupAction

Define how long (in minutes) the system shall be in idle mode before it goes into standby Define the camera position when leaving standby mode.
mode. Requires the Standby Control to be enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: RestoreCameraPosition
Default value: 10
Value space: None/RestoreCameraPosition/DefaultCameraPosition
Value space: Integer (1..480) None: No action.
Set the standby delay (minutes). RestoreCameraPosition: When the video system leaves standby, the camera returns to
the position that it had before entering standby.
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video system leaves standby, the camera moves to
Standby BootAction the factory default position.
Define the camera position after a restart of the codec.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection

Default value: DefaultCameraPosition Automatic wake up on motion detection is a feature that will sense when a person walks
into the room. The feature is based on ultrasound detection, and the Proximity Mode setting
Value space: None/DefaultCameraPosition/RestoreCameraPosition
must be On to make the feature work.
None: No action.
RestoreCameraPosition: When the video system restarts, the camera returns to the Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
position that it had before the restart. Default value: Off
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video system restarts, the camera moves to the
factory default position. Value space: Off/On
Off: The wake up on motion detection is disabled.
On: When people walk into the room the system will automatically wake up from standby.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
162
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

SystemUnit settings

SystemUnit Name SystemUnit CrashReporting Url

Define the system name. The system name will be sent as the hostname in a DHCP request If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
and when the codec is acting as an SNMP Agent. Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: "" Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 50)
Define the system name. Value space: String (0..255)
The URL to the Cisco Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR).

SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced

If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The ACR tool will perform standard log analyses.
On: The ACR tool will perform advanced log analyses.

SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode

If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: No logs will be sent to ACR tool.
On: The logs will automatically be sent to ACR tool.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
163
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Time settings

Time TimeFormat
Define the time format.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 24H

Value space: 24H/12H

24H: Set the time format to 24 hours.
12H: Set the time format to 12 hours (AM/PM).

Time DateFormat
Define the date format.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: DD_MM_YY

Value space: DD_MM_YY/MM_DD_YY/YY_MM_DD

DD_MM_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 30.01.10
MM_DD_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 01.30.10
YY_MM_DD: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 10.01.30

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
164
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Time Zone Miquelon, America/Moncton, America/Monterrey, America/Montevideo, America/Montreal,

America/Montserrat, America/Nassau, America/New_York, America/Nipigon, America/
Define the time zone for the geographical location of the video system. The information in Nome, America/Noronha, America/North_Dakota/Beulah, America/North_Dakota/Center,
the value space is from the tz database, also called the IANA Time Zone Database. America/North_Dakota/New_Salem, America/Ojinaga, America/Panama, America/
Pangnirtung, America/Paramaribo, America/Phoenix, America/Port-au-Prince, America/
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER Port_of_Spain, America/Porto_Acre, America/Porto_Velho, America/Puerto_Rico, America/
Default value: Etc/UTC Rainy_River, America/Rankin_Inlet, America/Recife, America/Regina, America/Resolute,
America/Rio_Branco, America/Rosario, America/Santa_Isabel, America/Santarem,
Value space: Africa/Abidjan, Africa/Accra, Africa/Addis_Ababa, Africa/Algiers, Africa/ America/Santiago, America/Santo_Domingo, America/Sao_Paulo, America/Scoresbysund,
Asmara, Africa/Asmera, Africa/Bamako, Africa/Bangui, Africa/Banjul, Africa/Bissau, Africa/ America/Shiprock, America/Sitka, America/St_Barthelemy, America/St_Johns, America/
Blantyre, Africa/Brazzaville, Africa/Bujumbura, Africa/Cairo, Africa/Casablanca, Africa/Ceuta, St_Kitts, America/St_Lucia, America/St_Thomas, America/St_Vincent, America/Swift_
Africa/Conakry, Africa/Dakar, Africa/Dar_es_Salaam, Africa/Djibouti, Africa/Douala, Africa/ Current, America/Tegucigalpa, America/Thule, America/Thunder_Bay, America/Tijuana,
El_Aaiun, Africa/Freetown, Africa/Gaborone, Africa/Harare, Africa/Johannesburg, Africa/ America/Toronto, America/Tortola, America/Vancouver, America/Virgin, America/
Juba, Africa/Kampala, Africa/Khartoum, Africa/Kigali, Africa/Kinshasa, Africa/Lagos, Africa/ Whitehorse, America/Winnipeg, America/Yakutat, America/Yellowknife, Antarctica/Casey,
Libreville, Africa/Lome, Africa/Luanda, Africa/Lubumbashi, Africa/Lusaka, Africa/Malabo, Antarctica/Davis, Antarctica/DumontDUrville, Antarctica/Macquarie, Antarctica/Mawson,
Africa/Maputo, Africa/Maseru, Africa/Mbabane, Africa/Mogadishu, Africa/Monrovia, Africa/ Antarctica/McMurdo, Antarctica/Palmer, Antarctica/Rothera, Antarctica/South_Pole,
Nairobi, Africa/Ndjamena, Africa/Niamey, Africa/Nouakchott, Africa/Ouagadougou, Africa/ Antarctica/Syowa, Antarctica/Troll, Antarctica/Vostok, Arctic/Longyearbyen, Asia/Aden,
Porto-Novo, Africa/Sao_Tome, Africa/Timbuktu, Africa/Tripoli, Africa/Tunis, Africa/ Asia/Almaty, Asia/Amman, Asia/Anadyr, Asia/Aqtau, Asia/Aqtobe, Asia/Ashgabat, Asia/
Windhoek, America/Adak, America/Anchorage, America/Anguilla, America/Antigua, Ashkhabad, Asia/Baghdad, Asia/Bahrain, Asia/Baku, Asia/Bangkok, Asia/Barnaul, Asia/
America/Araguaina, America/Argentina/Buenos_Aires, America/Argentina/Catamarca, Beirut, Asia/Bishkek, Asia/Brunei, Asia/Calcutta, Asia/Chita, Asia/Choibalsan, Asia/
America/Argentina/ComodRivadavia, America/Argentina/Cordoba, America/Argentina/Jujuy, Chongqing, Asia/Chungking, Asia/Colombo, Asia/Dacca, Asia/Damascus, Asia/Dhaka, Asia/
America/Argentina/La_Rioja, America/Argentina/Mendoza, America/Argentina/Rio_ Dili, Asia/Dubai, Asia/Dushanbe, Asia/Gaza, Asia/Harbin, Asia/Hebron, Asia/Ho_Chi_Minh,
Gallegos, America/Argentina/Salta, America/Argentina/San_Juan, America/Argentina/ Asia/Hong_Kong, Asia/Hovd, Asia/Irkutsk, Asia/Istanbul, Asia/Jakarta, Asia/Jayapura, Asia/
San_Luis, America/Argentina/Tucuman, America/Argentina/Ushuaia, America/Aruba, Jerusalem, Asia/Kabul, Asia/Kamchatka, Asia/Karachi, Asia/Kashgar, Asia/Kathmandu, Asia/
America/Asuncion, America/Atikokan, America/Atka, America/Bahia, America/Bahia_ Katmandu, Asia/Khandyga, Asia/Kolkata, Asia/Krasnoyarsk, Asia/Kuala_Lumpur, Asia/
Banderas, America/Barbados, America/Belem, America/Belize, America/Blanc-Sablon, Kuching, Asia/Kuwait, Asia/Macao, Asia/Macau, Asia/Magadan, Asia/Makassar, Asia/Manila,
America/Boa_Vista, America/Bogota, America/Boise, America/Buenos_Aires, America/ Asia/Muscat, Asia/Nicosia, Asia/Novokuznetsk, Asia/Novosibirsk, Asia/Omsk, Asia/Oral,
Cambridge_Bay, America/Campo_Grande, America/Cancun, America/Caracas, America/ Asia/Phnom_Penh, Asia/Pontianak, Asia/Pyongyang, Asia/Qatar, Asia/Qyzylorda, Asia/
Catamarca, America/Cayenne, America/Cayman, America/Chicago, America/Chihuahua, Rangoon, Asia/Riyadh, Asia/Saigon, Asia/Sakhalin, Asia/Samarkand, Asia/Seoul, Asia/
America/Coral_Harbour, America/Cordoba, America/Costa_Rica, America/Creston, Shanghai, Asia/Singapore, Asia/Srednekolymsk, Asia/Taipei, Asia/Tashkent, Asia/Tbilisi,
America/Cuiaba, America/Curacao, America/Danmarkshavn, America/Dawson, America/ Asia/Tehran, Asia/Tel_Aviv, Asia/Thimbu, Asia/Thimphu, Asia/Tokyo, Asia/Tomsk, Asia/
Dawson_Creek, America/Denver, America/Detroit, America/Dominica, America/Edmonton, Ujung_Pandang, Asia/Ulaanbaatar, Asia/Ulan_Bator, Asia/Urumqi, Asia/Ust-Nera, Asia/
America/Eirunepe, America/El_Salvador, America/Ensenada, America/Fort_Nelson, Vientiane, Asia/Vladivostok, Asia/Yakutsk, Asia/Yekaterinburg, Asia/Yerevan, Atlantic/
America/Fort_Wayne, America/Fortaleza, America/Glace_Bay, America/Godthab, America/ Azores, Atlantic/Bermuda, Atlantic/Canary, Atlantic/Cape_Verde, Atlantic/Faeroe, Atlantic/
Goose_Bay, America/Grand_Turk, America/Grenada, America/Guadeloupe, America/ Faroe, Atlantic/Jan_Mayen, Atlantic/Madeira, Atlantic/Reykjavik, Atlantic/South_Georgia,
Guatemala, America/Guayaquil, America/Guyana, America/Halifax, America/Havana, Atlantic/St_Helena, Atlantic/Stanley, Australia/ACT, Australia/Adelaide, Australia/Brisbane,
America/Hermosillo, America/Indiana/Indianapolis, America/Indiana/Knox, America/Indiana/ Australia/Broken_Hill, Australia/Canberra, Australia/Currie, Australia/Darwin, Australia/Eucla,
Marengo, America/Indiana/Petersburg, America/Indiana/Tell_City, America/Indiana/Vevay, Australia/Hobart, Australia/LHI, Australia/Lindeman, Australia/Lord_Howe, Australia/
America/Indiana/Vincennes, America/Indiana/Winamac, America/Indianapolis, America/ Melbourne, Australia/NSW, Australia/North, Australia/Perth, Australia/Queensland, Australia/
Inuvik, America/Iqaluit, America/Jamaica, America/Jujuy, America/Juneau, America/ South, Australia/Sydney, Australia/Tasmania, Australia/Victoria, Australia/West, Australia/
Kentucky/Louisville, America/Kentucky/Monticello, America/Knox_IN, America/Kralendijk, Yancowinna, Brazil/Acre, Brazil/DeNoronha, Brazil/East, Brazil/West, CET, CST6CDT,
America/La_Paz, America/Lima, America/Los_Angeles, America/Louisville, America/ Canada/Atlantic, Canada/Central, Canada/East-Saskatchewan, Canada/Eastern, Canada/
Lower_Princes, America/Maceio, America/Managua, America/Manaus, America/Marigot, Mountain, Canada/Newfoundland, Canada/Pacific, Canada/Saskatchewan, Canada/Yukon,
America/Martinique, America/Matamoros, America/Mazatlan, America/Mendoza, America/ Chile/Continental, Chile/EasterIsland, Cuba, EET, EST, EST5EDT, Egypt, Eire, Etc/GMT, Etc/
Menominee, America/Merida, America/Metlakatla, America/Mexico_City, America/ GMT+0, Etc/GMT+1, Etc/GMT+10, Etc/GMT+11, Etc/GMT+12, Etc/GMT+2, Etc/GMT+3, Etc/

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
165
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

GMT+4, Etc/GMT+5, Etc/GMT+6, Etc/GMT+7, Etc/GMT+8, Etc/GMT+9, Etc/GMT-0, Etc/GMT-1,

Etc/GMT-10, Etc/GMT-11, Etc/GMT-12, Etc/GMT-13, Etc/GMT-14, Etc/GMT-2, Etc/GMT-3,
Etc/GMT-4, Etc/GMT-5, Etc/GMT-6, Etc/GMT-7, Etc/GMT-8, Etc/GMT-9, Etc/GMT0, Etc/
Greenwich, Etc/UCT, Etc/UTC, Etc/Universal, Etc/Zulu, Europe/Amsterdam, Europe/Andorra,
Europe/Astrakhan, Europe/Athens, Europe/Belfast, Europe/Belgrade, Europe/Berlin, Europe/
Bratislava, Europe/Brussels, Europe/Bucharest, Europe/Budapest, Europe/Busingen,
Europe/Chisinau, Europe/Copenhagen, Europe/Dublin, Europe/Gibraltar, Europe/Guernsey,
Europe/Helsinki, Europe/Isle_of_Man, Europe/Istanbul, Europe/Jersey, Europe/Kaliningrad,
Europe/Kiev, Europe/Kirov, Europe/Lisbon, Europe/Ljubljana, Europe/London, Europe/
Luxembourg, Europe/Madrid, Europe/Malta, Europe/Mariehamn, Europe/Minsk, Europe/
Monaco, Europe/Moscow, Europe/Nicosia, Europe/Oslo, Europe/Paris, Europe/Podgorica,
Europe/Prague, Europe/Riga, Europe/Rome, Europe/Samara, Europe/San_Marino, Europe/
Sarajevo, Europe/Simferopol, Europe/Skopje, Europe/Sofia, Europe/Stockholm, Europe/
Tallinn, Europe/Tirane, Europe/Tiraspol, Europe/Ulyanovsk, Europe/Uzhgorod, Europe/
Vaduz, Europe/Vatican, Europe/Vienna, Europe/Vilnius, Europe/Volgograd, Europe/Warsaw,
Europe/Zagreb, Europe/Zaporozhye, Europe/Zurich, GB, GB-Eire, GMT, GMT+0, GMT-0,
GMT0, Greenwich, HST, Hongkong, Iceland, Indian/Antananarivo, Indian/Chagos, Indian/
Christmas, Indian/Cocos, Indian/Comoro, Indian/Kerguelen, Indian/Mahe, Indian/Maldives,
Indian/Mauritius, Indian/Mayotte, Indian/Reunion, Iran, Israel, Jamaica, Japan, Kwajalein,
Libya, MET, MST, MST7MDT, Mexico/BajaNorte, Mexico/BajaSur, Mexico/General, NZ,
NZ-CHAT, Navajo, PRC, PST8PDT, Pacific/Apia, Pacific/Auckland, Pacific/Bougainville,
Pacific/Chatham, Pacific/Chuuk, Pacific/Easter, Pacific/Efate, Pacific/Enderbury, Pacific/
Fakaofo, Pacific/Fiji, Pacific/Funafuti, Pacific/Galapagos, Pacific/Gambier, Pacific/
Guadalcanal, Pacific/Guam, Pacific/Honolulu, Pacific/Johnston, Pacific/Kiritimati, Pacific/
Kosrae, Pacific/Kwajalein, Pacific/Majuro, Pacific/Marquesas, Pacific/Midway, Pacific/Nauru,
Pacific/Niue, Pacific/Norfolk, Pacific/Noumea, Pacific/Pago_Pago, Pacific/Palau, Pacific/
Pitcairn, Pacific/Pohnpei, Pacific/Ponape, Pacific/Port_Moresby, Pacific/Rarotonga, Pacific/
Saipan, Pacific/Samoa, Pacific/Tahiti, Pacific/Tarawa, Pacific/Tongatapu, Pacific/Truk,
Pacific/Wake, Pacific/Wallis, Pacific/Yap, Poland, Portugal, ROC, ROK, Singapore, Turkey,
UCT, US/Alaska, US/Aleutian, US/Arizona, US/Central, US/East-Indiana, US/Eastern, US/
Hawaii, US/Indiana-Starke, US/Michigan, US/Mountain, US/Pacific, US/Pacific-New, US/
Samoa, UTC, Universal, W-SU, WET, Zulu
Select a time zone from the list.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
166
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

UserInterface settings

UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification UserInterface ContactInfo Type

You can enable an incoming call notification with amplified visuals. The screen and Touch Choose which type of contact information to show in the user interface.
10 will flash red/white approximately once every second (1.75 Hz) to make it easier for
hearing impaired users to notice an incoming call. If the system is already in a call the Requires user role: ADMIN
screen will not flash as this will disturb the on-going call, instead you will get a normal Default value: Auto
notification on screen and touch panel.
Value space: Auto/DisplayName/E164Alias/H320Number/H323Id/IPv4/IPv6/None/SipUri/
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER SystemName
Default value: Default Auto: Show the address which another system should dial to reach this video system.
The address depends on the default call protocol and system registration.
Value space: AmplifiedVisuals/Default
None: Do not show any contact information.
AmplifiedVisuals: Enable the amplified visuals on screen and touch panel when the video
system receives a call. IPv4: Show the system's IPv4 address.

Default: Enable the default behavior with a notification on screen and touch panel. IPv6: Show the system's IPv6 address.
H323Id: Show the system's H.323 ID (refer to the H323 H323Alias ID setting).
H320Number: Show the system's H.320 number as contact information (only supported
if used with Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link).
E164Alias: Show the system's H.323 E164 Alias as contact information (refer to the H323
H323Alias E164 setting).
SipUri: Show the system's SIP URI (refer to the SIP URI setting).
SystemName: Show the system's name (refer to the SystemUnit Name setting).
DisplayName: Show the system's display name (refer to the SIP DisplayName setting).

UserInterface CustomMessage
A custom message can be displayed, in the lower left side of the screen, in awake mode.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 128)

Add a custom message. Add an empty string to remove a custom message.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
167
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

UserInterface KeyTones Mode UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator

You can configure the system to make a keyboard click sound effect (key tone) when typing Define for how long the encryption indicator is shown on screen. The icon for encrypted
text or numbers. calls is a locked padlock.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On Default value: Auto

Value space: Off/On Value space: Auto/AlwaysOn/AlwaysOff

Off: There is no key tone sound effect. Auto: If the call is encrypted, a "Call is encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
On: The key tone sound effect is turned on. Then, an encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
If the call is not encrypted, a "Call is not encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
No encryption indicator icon is shown.
UserInterface Language AlwaysOn: The “Call is encrypted” notification is shown for 5 seconds. Then, an
encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
Select the language to be used in the user interface. If the language is not supported, the
default language (English) will be used. AlwaysOff: The encryption indicator is never displayed on screen.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: English UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
A custom message can be displayed in the middle of the main screen when the system is
Value space: Arabic/Catalan/ChineseSimplified/ChineseTraditional/Czech/Danish/Dutch/
in the half wake state. The custom message will replace the default message, which gives
English/EnglishUK/Finnish/French/FrenchCanadian/German/Hebrew/Hungarian/Italian/
instructions how to start using the video system. You can also delete the default message,
Japanese/Korean/Norwegian/Polish/Portuguese/PortugueseBrazilian/Russian/Spanish/
without adding a custom message.
SpanishLatin/Swedish/Turkish
Select a language from the list. Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 128)

The custom message. An empty string: Restore the default message. A space only:
There will be no message at all.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
168
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

UserInterface OSD Output UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode

Define on which monitor the on-screen information and indicators (OSD) should be The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch 10 or on-screen) can be protected by the
displayed. video system's admin password. If this password is blank, anyone can access the settings
in the Settings menu, and for example factory reset the system. If authentication is enabled,
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR all settings that require authentication have a padlock icon. You will be prompted to enter
Default value: Auto the administrator's user name and passphrase when you select the setting. Some settings
do not require authentication, they do not have a padlock icon.
Value space: Auto/1/2/3
Requires user role: ADMIN
Auto: The system detects when a monitor is connected to a video output, and sends
the on-screen information and indicators to the first monitor you connect. If you have Default value: Unlocked
a multi-monitor setup, and all monitors are connected before switching on the system,
the on-screen information and indicators are sent to the video output with the lowest Value space: Locked/Unlocked
number, starting with Output Connector 1 (HDMI 1). Locked: Authentication with administrator's username and passphrase is required.
1-3: The system sends the on-screen information and indicators to the specified output. Unlocked: No authentication is required.
Choose n to send the on-screen information and indicators to the system's Output
Connector n.
UserInterface Wallpaper
UserInterface Security Mode Select a background image (wallpaper) for the video screen when idle.
You may upload a custom wallpaper to the video system using the web interface. The
This setting allows you to prevent important system information from being exposed in the following file formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG. The maximum file size is 4
user interface (drop down menu and Settings panel), for example the contact information MByte. When you use a custom wallpaper, the clock and the list of upcoming meetings are
and IP addresses of the video system, touch controller, and UCM/VCS registrars. It is removed from the main display
important to note that such information is not hidden when navigating further into the
Settings panel. Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
If you want to fully prevent that people without administrator rights can see the contact Default value: Auto
information, IP addresses, MAC address, serial number, and software version, you must
also set the UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode to Locked, and of course have a passphrase Value space: Auto/Custom/None
for all user accounts with administrator rights. Auto: Use the default wallpaper.
Requires user role: ADMIN None: There is no background image on the screen.
Default value: Normal Custom: Use the custom wallpaper as background image on the screen. If no custom
wallpaper is uploaded to the system, the setting will revert to the default value.
Value space: Normal/Strong
Normal: IP addresses and other system information are shown on the user interface.
Strong: Contact information and IP addresses are not displayed on the user interface
(drop down menu and Settings panel).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
169
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

UserManagement settings

UserManagement LDAP Mode UserManagement LDAP Server Address

The video system supports the use of an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Set the IP address or hostname of the LDAP server.
server as a central place to store and validate user names and passwords. Use this setting
to configure whether or not to use LDAP authentication. Our implementation is tested for Requires user role: ADMIN
the Microsoft Active Directory (AD) service. Default value: ""
If you switch on LDAP Mode, make sure to configure the other UserManagement LDAP
settings to suit your setup. Here is a few examples. Value space: String (0..255)
Example 1: A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or hostname.
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "[Link]"
UserManagement LDAP Server Port
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
Set the port to connect to the LDAP server on. If set to 0, use the default for the selected
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Group: "CN=admin group, OU=company groups,
protocol (see the UserManagement LDAP Encryption setting).
DC=company, DC=com"
Example 2: Requires user role: ADMIN
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On Default value: 0
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "[Link]"
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
The LDAP server port number.
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter: "(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company
groups, DC=company, DC=com)(sAMAccountName=username))"

Requires user role: ADMIN UserManagement LDAP Encryption

Default value: Off Define how to secure the communication between the video system and the LDAP server.
You can override the port number by using the UserManagement LDAP Server Port setting.
Value space: Off/On
Off: LDAP authentication is not allowed. Requires user role: ADMIN
On: LDAP authentication is allowed. Default value: LDAPS

Value space: LDAPS/None/STARTTLS

LDAPS: Connect to the LDAP server on port 636 over TLS (Transport Layer Security).
None: Connect to LDAP server on port 389 with no encryption.
STARTTLS: Connect to LDAP server on port 389, then send STARTTLS to enable TLS
encryption.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
170
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter

Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed. The LDAP filter is used to determine which users should be granted administrator privileges.
You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Requires user role: ADMIN Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
Default value: TLSv1.2 UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.

Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2 Requires user role: ADMIN

TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher. Default value: ""
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
Value space: String (0, 1024)
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.
Refer to the LDAP specification for the syntax of this string. Example:
"(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com)
(sAMAccountName=username))"
UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate
When the video system connects to an LDAP server, the server will identify itself to the
video system by presenting its certificate. Use this setting to determine whether or not the UserManagement LDAP Admin Group
video system will verify the server certificate.
Members of this AD (Active Directory) group will be given administrator access. This setting
Requires user role: ADMIN is a shorthand for saying (memberOf:1.2.840.113556.1.4.1941:=<group name>).
Default value: On You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
Value space: Off/On UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.
Off: The video system will not verify the LDAP server’s certificate.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: The video system must verify that the LDAP server’s certificate is signed by a
Default value: ""
trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA must be on the list of trusted CAs that are
uploaded to the system in advance. Use the video system’s web interface to manage the Value space: String (0..255)
list of trusted CAs (see more details in the administrator guide).
The distinguished name of the AD group. Example: "CN=admin group, OU=company
groups, DC=company, DC=com"

UserManagement LDAP Attribute

The attribute used to map to the provided username. If not set, sAMAccountName is used.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The attribute name.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
171
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

UserManagement LDAP BaseDN

The distinguishing name of the entry at which to start a search (base).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The distinguishing name of the base. Example: "DC=company, DC=com"

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
172
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video settings

Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local

Define the position on screen of the active speaker picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only Select which video layout family to use locally.
takes effect when using a video layout where the active speaker is a PiP, i.e. the Overlay
layout, or possibly a Custom layout (refer to the Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local setting). Requires user role: ADMIN
The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call, it will have no Default value: Auto
effect on the current call.
Value space: Auto/Equal/Prominent/Overlay/Single
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Auto: The default layout family, as given in the layout database provided by the system,
Default value: Current will be used as the local layout.

Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/ Equal: The Equal layout family will be used as the local layout. All videos have equal size,
LowerLeft/LowerRight as long as there is space enough on the screen.

Current: The position of the active speaker PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a Prominent: The Prominent layout family will be used as the local layout. The active
call. speaker, or the presentation if present, will be a large picture, while the other participants
will be small pictures. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.
UpperLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
Overlay: The Overlay layout family will be used as the local layout. The active speaker,
UpperCenter: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper center position. or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen, while the other participants
UpperRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen. will be small pictures-in-picture (PiP). Transitions between active speakers are voice
CenterLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center left position. switched.
CentreRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center right position. Single: The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen.
The other participants are not shown. Transitions between active speakers are voice
LowerLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen. switched.
LowerRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
173
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl Mode

Select which video layout family to be used for the remote participants. Define whether the camera that is connected to this video input connector can be
controlled or not.
Requires user role: ADMIN Note that camera control is not available for Connector 5 (S-video/Composite).
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/Equal/Prominent/Overlay/Single Default value: Connector 1, 2, 3: On Connector 4, 5: Off
Auto: The default layout family, as given by the local layout database, will be used as the
remote layout. Value space: Connector 1, 2, 3, 4: Off/On Connector 5: Off
Equal: The Equal layout family will be used as the remote layout. All videos have equal Off: Disable camera control.
size, as long as there is space enough on the screen. On: Enable camera control.
Prominent: The Prominent layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active
speaker, or the presentation if present, will be a large picture, while the other participants
will be small pictures. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched. Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl CameraId
Overlay: The Overlay layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active speaker,
The camera ID is a unique identifier of the cameras that are connected to the video input.
or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen, while the other participants
Use the xStatus Camera API command to see the IDs of the different cameras.
will be small pictures-in-picture (PiP). Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Single: The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen.
Default value: Connector n: n Connector 5: 1
The other participants are not shown. Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched. Value space: Connector 1, 2, 3, 4: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7 Connector 5: 1
Select the ID of the camera.
Video DefaultMainSource
Define which video input source to be used as the default main video source when you start
a call.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 1

Value space: 1/2/3/4

Set the source to be used as the default main video source.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
174
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Input Connector [4..4] DviType Video Input Connector [1..5] Name
The official DVI standard supports both digital and analog signals. In most cases the default Define a name for the video input connector.
AutoDetect setting can detect whether the signal is analog RGB or digital. However, in some
rare cases when DVI-I cables are used (these cables can carry both the analog and digital Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
signals) the auto detection fails. This setting makes it possible to override the AutoDetect Default value: ""
and select the correct DVI video input.
Value space: String (0, 50)
Requires user role: ADMIN
Name for the video input connector.
Default value: AutoDetect

Value space: AutoDetect/Digital/AnalogRGB/AnalogYPbPr

Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Profile
AutoDetect: Set to AutoDetect to automatically detect if the signal is analog RGB or
digital. This setting will not take effect if the corresponding Video Input Connector [n] Quality
setting is set to Sharpness.
Digital: Set to Digital to force the DVI video input to Digital when using DVI-I cables with
both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails. The optimal definition profile reflects the lighting conditions in the video conferencing room
and the quality of the camera. The better lighting conditions and the better quality of the
AnalogRGB: Set to AnalogRGB to force the DVI video input to AnalogRGB when using
camera, the higher the profile. Generally, the Normal or Medium profiles are recommended.
DVI-I cables with both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails.
However, when the lighting conditions are very good, the High profile can be set in order to
AnalogYPbPr: Set to AnalogYPbPr to force the DVI video input to AnalogYPbPr, as the increase the resolution for a given call rate. The resolution must be supported by both the
component (YPbPr) signal cannot be auto detected. calling and called systems.
Use the Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps setting to set the
lowest resolution where 60 fps is allowed. Below this threshold 30 fps is the manximum
Video Input Connector [1..5] InputSourceType frame rate.
Select which type of input source is connected to the video input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: Medium
Default value: Connector 1 and 2: camera Connector 3 and 4: PC Connector 5: other
Value space: Normal/Medium/High
Value space: PC/camera/document_camera/mediaplayer/whiteboard/other Normal: Use this profile for a normally to poorly lit environment. Resolutions will be set
PC: Use this when a computer is connected to the video input. rather conservative.
camera: Use this when a camera is connected to the video input. Medium: Requires good and stable lighting conditions and a good quality video input. For
some call rates this leads to higher resolution.
document_camera: Use this when a document camera is connected to the video input.
High: Requires nearly optimal video conferencing lighting conditions and a good quality
mediaplayer: Use this when a media player is connected to the video input. video input in order to achieve a good overall experience. Rather high resolutions will be
whiteboard: Use this when a whiteboard camera is connected to the video input. used.
other: Use this when the other options do not match.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
175
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps Video Input Connector [1..4] PresentationSelection
For each video input, this setting tells the system the lowest resolution where it can transmit Define how the video system will behave when you connect a presentation source to the
60 fps. So for all resolutions lower than this, the maximum transmitted frame rate would be video input. In general, any input source can be used as a presentation source; normally,
30 fps, while above this resolution 60fps would also be possible, if the available bandwidth the main camera will not be used as a presentation source.
is adequate. If the video system is in standby mode, it will wake up when you connect a presentation
source. Sharing the presentation with the far end requires additional action (select Share on
Requires user role: ADMIN the user interface) except when this setting is set to AutoShare.
Default value: 1280_720
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: 512_288/768_448/1024_576/1280_720/1920_1080/Never Default value: Connector 1, 2: Manual Connector 3, 4: OnConnect
512_288: Set the threshold to 512x288.
768_448: Set the threshold to 768x448. Value space: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect
1024_576: Set the threshold to 1024x576. AutoShare: While in a call, the content on the video input will automatically be presented
to the far end as well as on the local screen when you connect the cable, or when the
1280_720: Set the threshold to 1280x720. source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from
1920_1080: Set the threshold to 1920x1080. sleep mode). You do not have to select Share on the user interface. If a presentation
Never: Do not set a threshold for transmitting 60fps. source is already connected when you make or answer a call, you have to manually
select Share on the user interface.
Desktop: The content on the video input will be presented on the screen when you
connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a
connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). This applies both when idle and in a
call. Also, the content on the video input will stay on the screen when you leave the call,
provided that it was the active input at the time of leaving.
Manual: The content on the video input will not be presented on the screen until you
select Share from the user interface.
OnConnect: The content on the video input will be presented on screen when you
connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a
connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). Otherwise, the behavior is the same
as in manual mode.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
176
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Input Connector [1..5] Quality Video Input Connector [5] SignalType
When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off between high resolution and Connector 5 can be used for either S-Video or Composite video input format. Use this
high frame rate. For some video sources it is more important to transmit high frame rate setting to configure which video format the BNC connector(s) are used for.
than high resolution and vice versa. This setting specifies whether to give priority to high
frame rate or to high resolution. Requires user role: ADMIN
If a Quad Camera, SpeakerTrack 60 camera, or Precision 60 camera is detected by the Default value: Composite
video system this setting is automatically set to Motion. If a user changes this setting
manually, it will be set back to Motion after a restart or a camera reconnect. Value space: Composite/YC
Composite: Connector 5 is configured for composite video input. Only the BNC
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR connector that is labeled "Y" is used.
Default value: Connector 1, 2, 5: Motion Connector 3, 4: Sharpness YC: Connector 5 is configured for S-Video input. Both BNC connectors ("Y" and "C")
are used.
Value space: Motion/Sharpness
Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher
frame rates, typically when a large number of participants are present or when there is a Video Input Connector [1..5] Visibility
lot of motion in the picture.
Define the visibility of the video input connector in the menus on the user interface.
Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest
quality of detailed images and graphics.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1, 2, 3: IfSignal Connector 4: Always Connector 5: Never
Video Input Connector [1..4] RGBQuantizationRange Value space: Always/IfSignal/Never
The devices connected to the video input should follow the rules for RGB video quantization Always: The menu selection for the video input connector will always be visible on the
range defined in CEA-861. Unfortunately some devices do not follow the standard and this user interface.
configuration may be used to override the settings to get a perfect image with any source. IfSignal: Yhe menu selection for the video input connector will only be visible when
something is connected to the video input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Never: The input source is not expected to be used as a presentation source, and will
Default value: Connector 1, 2, 3: Auto Connector 4: Full
not show up on the user interface.
Value space: Auto/Full/Limited
Auto: RGB quantization range is automatically selected based on video format according
to CEA-861-E. CE video formats will use limited quantization range levels. IT video
formats will use full quantization range levels.
Full: Full quantization range. The R, G, B quantization range includes all code values (0 -
255). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
Limited: Limited Quantization Range. R, G, B quantization range that excludes some code
values at the extremes (16 - 235). This is defined in CEA-861-E.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
177
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Monitors Video Output Connector [1..2] CEC Mode

A monitor role is assigned to each screen using the Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole This video output (HDMI) supports Consumer Electronics Control (CEC).
setting. The monitor role decides which layout (call participants and presentation) will When this setting is On, the system will use CEC to set the screen in standby when the
appear on the screen that is connected to this output. Screens with the same monitor role system itself enters standby. Likewise the system will wake up the screen when the system
will get the same layout; screens with different monitor roles will have different layouts. itself wakes up from standby.
The monitor layout mode that is set in the Video Monitors setting should reflect the number Note that the different manufacturers uses different marketing names for CEC, for example
of different layouts you want in your room setup. Note that some screens can be reserved Anynet+ (Samsung); Aquos Link (Sharp); BRAVIA Sync (Sony); HDMI-CEC (Hitachi); Kuro
for presentations. Link (Pioneer); CE-Link and Regza Link (Toshiba); RIHD (Onkyo); HDAVI Control, EZ-Sync,
VIERA Link (Panasonic); EasyLink (Philips); and NetCommand for HDMI (Mitsubishi).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Value space: Auto/Single/Dual/DualPresentationOnly/TriplePresentationOnly/Triple
Auto: The number of screens connected to the video system is automatically detected, Value space: Off/On
and the layout is distributed on the screens according to the monitor role. Off: CEC is disabled.
Single: The same layout is shown on all screens. On: CEC is enabled.
Dual: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First and Second. If a
presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with
monitor role First, and the presentation is shown on screens with monitor role Second.
DualPresentationOnly: All participants in the call are shown on screens with monitor role
First. If a presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on screens with
monitor role Second.
Triple: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First, Second and Third.
Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First, and finally Third. If a
presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with
monitor role First and Second, and the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor
role Third.
TriplePresentationOnly: All participants in the call are distributed on screens with monitor
role First and Second. Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First. If a
presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor
role Third.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
178
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Output Connector [1..3] Location HorizontalOffset Video Output Connector [1..3] Location VerticalOffset
HorizontalOffset and VerticalOffset settings are associated with each video output. These HorizontalOffset and VerticalOffset settings are associated with each video output. These
settings are used to signal the relative position of the displays that are connected to these settings are used to signal the relative position of the displays that are connected to these
outputs. outputs.
HorizontalOffset = 0 and VerticalOffset = 0 indicates that the display is positioned in center, HorizontalOffset = 0 and VerticalOffset = 0 indicates that the display is positioned in center,
both horizontally and vertically. A negative horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is both horizontally and vertically. A negative horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is
left of center, and a positive horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is right of center. left of center, and a positive horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is right of center.
A negative vertical offset indicates that the monitor is below center, and a positive vertical A negative vertical offset indicates that the monitor is below center, and a positive vertical
offset indicates that the monitor is above center. The magnitude of the offset indicates how offset indicates that the monitor is above center. The magnitude of the offset indicates how
far the display is from center (relative to other displays). far the display is from center (relative to other displays).
Example: You have two screens side by side. The left screen is on Connector 1 and the Example: You have two screens side by side. The left screen is on Connector 1 and the
right screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply: right screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0 Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 1, VerticalOffset = 0 Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 1, VerticalOffset = 0
Example: You have two screens, one below the other. The upper screen is on Connector 1 Example: You have two screens, one below the other. The upper screen is on Connector 1
and the lower screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply: and the lower screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0 Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = -1 Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = -1

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1: -1 Connector 2: 0 Connector 3: 1 Default value: Connector n: 0

Value space: Integer (-100..100) Value space: Integer (-100..100)

Range: The value must be between -100 and 100. Range: The value must be between -100 and 100.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
179
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Output Connector [1..3] MonitorRole Video Output Connector [1..3] RGBQuantizationRange
The monitor role describes which video streams will be shown on the screen connected to Devices connected to an HDMI output should follow the rules for RGB video quantization
this video output. Together the Video Monitors setting and the MonitorRole settings for all range defined in CEA-861. Unfortunately some devices do not follow the standard and this
outputs define which layout (video streams) will be shown on each screen. configuration may be used to override the settings to get a perfect image with any display.
Most HDMI displays expects full quantization range.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Full
Value space: Auto/First/Second/Third/PresentationOnly/Recorder
Auto: The system will detect when a screen is connected, and a monitor role (First, Value space: Auto/Full/Limited
Second, Third) that corresponds with the Video Monitors setting will be assigned Auto: RGB quantization range is automatically selected based on the RGB Quantization
automatically. Range bits (Q0, Q1) in the AVI infoframe. If no AVI infoframe is available, RGB quantization
First/Second/Third: Define the role of the screen in a multi-screen setup. In a single- range is selected based on video format according to CEA-861-E.
screen setup, there is no difference between First, Second and Third. Full: Full quantization range. The R, G, B quantization range includes all code values (0 -
PresentationOnly: Show presentation video stream if active, and nothing else. Screens/ 255). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
outputs with this monitor role are disregarded by the Video Monitors setting. Limited: Limited Quantization Range. R, G, B quantization range that excludes some code
Recorder: Show all participants, including the local main video (self-view). If active, also values at the extremes (16 - 235). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
show the presentation. Screens/outputs with this monitor role are ignored by the Video
Monitors setting.
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
Define the position on screen of the presentation picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only
Video Output Connector [1..3] Resolution takes effect when the presentation is explicitly minimized to a PiP, for example using the
Define the resolution and refresh rate for the connected screen. user interface. The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call,
it will have no effect on the current call.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector n: Auto
Default value: Current
Value space: Auto/1280_720_50/1280_720_60/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_60/1920_120
0_50/1920_1200_60 Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/
LowerLeft/LowerRight
Auto: The system will automatically try to set the optimal resolution based on negotiation
with the connected monitor. Current: The position of the presentation PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.
1280_720_50: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz. UpperLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
1280_720_60: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz. UpperCenter: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper center position.
1920_1080_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz. UpperRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
1920_1080_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz. CenterLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the center left position.
1920_1200_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz. CenterRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the center right position.
1920_1200_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz. LowerLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
LowerRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
180
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Presentation DefaultSource Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode

Define which video input source to use as a default presentation source. This setting may Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be shown in full screen or as a small
be used by the API and 3rd party user interfaces. It is not relevant when using the user picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call. The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched
interfaces provided by Cisco. on (see the Video Selfview Default Mode setting).

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 3 Default value: Current

Value space: 1/2/3/4 Value space: Off/Current/On

The video input source to use as default presentation source. Off: Self-view will be shown as a PiP.
Current: The size of the self-view picture will be kept unchanged when leaving a call, i.e.
if it was a PiP during the call, it remains a PiP after the call; if it was fullscreen during the
Video Selfview Default Mode call, it remains fullscreen after the call.
Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be displayed on screen after a call. The On: The self-view picture will be shown in fullscreen.
position and size of the self-view window is determined by the Video Selfview Default
PIPPosition and the Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode settings respectively.
Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define which screen/output to display the main video source (self-view) on after a call. The
Default value: Current value reflects the monitor roles set for the different outputs in the Video Output Connector
[n] MonitorRole setting.
Value space: Off/Current/On
The setting applies both when self-view is displayed in full screen, and when it is displayed
Off: Self-view is switched off when leaving a call.
as picture-in-picture (PiP).
Current: Self-view is left as is, i.e. if it was on during the call, it remains on after the call;
if it was off during the call, it remains off after the call. Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
On: Self-view is switched on when leaving a call. Default value: Current

Value space: Current/First/Second/Third

Current: When leaving a call, the self-view picture will be retained on the same output as
it was during the call.
First: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output Connector [n]
MonitorRole set to First.
Second: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output
Connector [n] MonitorRole set to Second.
Third: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output Connector
[n] MonitorRole set to Third.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
181
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Video Selfview Default PIPPosition Video Selfview OnCall Duration

Define the position on screen of the small self-view picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call. This setting only has an effect when the Video Selfview OnCall Mode setting is switched
The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched on (see the Video Selfview On. In this case, the number of seconds set here determines for how long self-view is
Default Mode setting) and fullscreen view is switched off (see the Video Selfview Default shown before it is automatically switched off.
FullscreenMode setting).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR Default value: 10
Default value: Current
Value space: Integer (1..60)
Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/ Range: Choose for how long self-view remains on. The valid range is between 1 and 60
LowerLeft/LowerRight seconds.
Current: The position of the self-view PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.
UpperLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
UpperCenter: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper center position.
UpperRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
CenterLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the center left position.
CentreRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the center right position.
LowerLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
LowerRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.

Video Selfview OnCall Mode

This setting is used to switch on self-view for a short while when setting up a call. The
Video Selfview OnCall Duration setting determines for how long it remains on. This applies
when self-view in general is switched off.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Self-view is not shown automatically during call setup.
On: Self-view is shown automatically during call setup.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
182
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System

System settings
settings Appendices

Experimental settings
The Experimental settings are for testing only and should not be used unless agreed with
Cisco. These settings are not documented and WILL change in later releases.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
183
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Appendices

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
184
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

How to use Touch 10

The Touch 10 user interface and its use are described in
full detail in the User guide for the video system.

Tap ? to contact Help desk or access other

facility services, if available.

Tap the system name or contact

Tap the Camera icon to activate
information to access System
self-view and camera control.
Information, Settings, Restart
and Factory reset. You can also
activate Call forwarding, Standby,
and Do not disturb modes. Time of day.

Tap Call to make a

call, and to invoke the Tap Share to start
Favorites, Directory and sharing content and to
Recents contact lists. conduct presentations.

Entry point for user interface

extensions (your system
Tap Messages to invoke may have zero or more such
the voice mail system, if buttons with different color,
available. text and icons).

Press and hold the

left side of the Volume
button to decrease the
loudspeaker volume and Press the Microphone
the right side to increase button to mute and unmute
the volume. microphones.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
185
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Set up remote monitoring

Requirement: Check whether or not the video system has the About snapshots
• RemoteMonitoring option RemoteMonitoring option
1. Sign in to the web interface. Local input sources
Remote monitoring is useful when you want to control the video Snapshots of the local input sources
system from another location. 2. Check the Home page to see if RemoteMonitoring is on the
list of Installed options. of the video system appear on the Call
Snapshots from input sources appear in the web interface, so you Control page.
If not on the list, remote monitoring is not available.
can check the camera view and control the camera without being Snapshots appear both when the video
in the room. system is idle, and when in a call.
If enabled, snapshots are refreshed automatically approximately Enable remote monitoring
every 5 seconds. Install the RemoteMonitoring option key. How to install option keys Far end snapshots
are described in the ► Add option keys chapter.
When in call, you may also see snapshots
from the far end camera. It does not
PLEASE BE AWARE THAT IF YOU ENABLE THE REMOTE MONITORING matter whether or not the far end video
OPTION YOU MUST MAKE SURE THAT YOU COMPLY WITH LOCAL system has the RemoteMonitoring option.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS WITH REGARD TO PRIVACY AND PROVIDE
ADEQUATE NOTICE TO USERS OF THE SYSTEM THAT THE SYSTEM Far end snapshots are not displayed if the
ADMINISTRATOR MAY MONITOR AND CONTROL THE CAMERA AND call is encrypted.
SCREEN. IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO COMPLY WITH PRIVACY
REGULATIONS WHEN USING THE SYSTEM AND CISCO DISCLAIMS ALL
LIABILITY FOR ANY UNLAWFUL USE OF THIS FEATURE.

Automatically refresh snapshots

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
186
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Access call information while using the web interface

About the call state indicator
The call state indicator shows whether
the system is in a call or not, and how
many calls it is engaged in. You may also
Call state indicator be notified about incoming calls.
The badge indicates the
The call state indicator is available on all
number of active calls. If
pages except the Call Control page.
the system is idle, there is
no badge.
Click the indicator to
get more details about
connected calls.

Open the Call Information Switch incoming call Control the call(s)
window notifications on or off Relevant control buttons appear in
Click the Call state indicator to open Click Ignore incoming call notices, the Call Information window. Use the
the Call Information window manually. to decide whether or not the Call buttons to:
Information window should pop up
As default, the Call Information window automatically when the video system Show call details
pops up automatically when the video receives a call.
system receives a call. Put the call on hold
When the check box is checked, the
Call Information window will not open Answer the call
automatically.
Disconnect the call
Open the Call Control page
Click Open Call Control to go straight
to the Call Control page.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
187
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Place a call using the web interface (page 1 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control. Send DTMF tones
Click to open a key pad that you can use if your application
Place a call requires DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) signaling.

Even if the web interface is used to initiate the call, it is the

video system (display, microphones and loudspeakers)
that is used for the call; it is not the PC running the web
interface.

1. Navigate the Favorites, Directory or Recents lists to find the

correct entry; or enter one or more characters in the Search
or Dial field*. Click the correct contact name.

2. Click Call in the contact card.

Show/hide call details
Click the information button to show details about the
Alternatively, enter the complete URI or number in the Search and call.
Dial field. Then click the Call button that appears next to the URI
or number. Click the button again to hide the information.

Hold and resume a call

Use the button next to a participant’s name to put
that participant on hold.
To resume the call, use the button that is present
when a participant is on hold.

End a call
If you want to terminate a call or conference, click
Disconnect all. Confirm your choice in the dialog that
appears.
*
When searching, matching entries from the Favorites, Directory and Recents To disconnect just one participant in a conference,
lists will be listed as you type. click the button for that participant.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
188
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Place a call using the web interface (page 2 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.

Calling more than one

A point-to-point video call (a call involving two parties only) can
be expanded to include one more participant on audio-only.
If your system is using the optional built-in MultiSite feature, up
to five participants, yourself included, can join the video call
(conference). In addition, one more participant can join on audio-
only.
Follow the same procedure to call the next conference participant
as you did when calling the first participant.
Calling more than one using a conference bridge (CUCM ad hoc
conferencing) is not supported from the web interface, even if it is
supported by the video system itself.

Adjust the volume

Mute the microphone

Click Microphone: On to mute the microphone.
Then the text changes to Microphone: Off.
Click Microphone: Off to unmute.
Volume down

Volume up

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
189
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Share content using the web interface

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control. About content sharing
You can connect a presentation source
to one of the video inputs of your video
Share content system. Most often a PC is used as
Presentation source
1. Choose which content source to share in presentation source, but other options
drop down list may be available depending on your
the Presentation source drop down list.
Choose which input system setup.
2. Click Start Presentation. Then the text source to share, from the
changes to Stop Presentation. While in a call you can share content with
drop down list.
the other participant(s) in the call (far
Stop content sharing: end).

Click the Stop Presentation button that is Snapshot area If you are not in a call, the content is
present while sharing. shown locally.
Shows snapshots of the
selected presentation
source.
Only available on video
systems that have the
Remote Monitoring
option.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
190
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Local layout control

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control. About layouts
The term layout is used to describe the
various ways presentations and videos
can appear on the screens. Different
types of meetings may require different
layouts.
The number of call or conference
participants are reflected in the available
choices.

Change the layout

Click Layout, and choose your preferred
layout in the window that opens.
The set of layouts to choose from
depends on the system configuration.
You may change the layout both when idle
and in a call.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
191
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Control a local camera

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.

Prerequisites
• The Video > Input > Connector n > CameraControl > Main source drop down list
Mode setting is switched On .
Choose which camera to control from
• The camera has pan, tilt or zoom functionality.
the drop down list.
• Speaker tracking is switched Off.

Snapshot area
Shows snapshots of the selected main input source.
Only available on video systems that have the
Remote Monitoring option.

Automatically refresh snapshots

Move the camera to a preset position
1. Choose which camera to control in the Main
source drop down list.

2. Click Presets... to open a list of available

presets.
Move the camera using the pan/tilt/zoom controls If no presets are defined, the button is
Camera control is not available when speaker tracking is disabled and named No presets.
switched on.
3. Click a preset’s name to move the camera to
1. Choose which camera to control in the Main source drop the preset position.
down list.
4. Click OK to close the window.
2. Click the camera icon to open the camera control
window.
Video snapshots from the room are only displayed for You cannot use the web interface to
video systems that have the Remote Monitoring option. define a preset; you should use the
Touch controller.
3. Use the left and right arrows to pan the camera; the up
When you select a preset, speaker
and down arrows to tilt it; and + and - to zoom in and out.
tracking will be switched off
Only relevant controls appear in the window. automatically.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
192
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Control a far end camera

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.

Prerequisites
While in a call, you can control the remote participant’s camera
(far end) provided that:
• The Conference > FarEndControl > Mode setting is switched
On on the far end video system.
• The far end camera has pan, tilt or zoom functionality. Only
the relevant controls will appear.
• Speaker tracking is not switched On on the far end camera.
• The local video system has the Remote Monitoring option.

Control the remote participant’s camera

1. Click the camera icon to open the remote
camera control window.

2. Use the left and right arrows to pan the

camera; the up and down arrows to tilt it; and
+ and - to zoom in and out.
If you are not allowed to control the far end
camera, the controls will not appear in the
image.
If the call is encrypted, the far end snapshot
behind the controls are not displayed.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
193
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Packet loss resilience - ClearPath

ClearPath introduces several mechanisms for advanced packet
loss resilience. These mechanisms increase the experienced
quality when you use your video system in an error prone
environment.
ClearPath is a Cisco proprietary protocol. All endpoints running
CE software support ClearPath.
If the involved endpoints and infrastructure elements support
ClearPath, all packet loss resilience mechanisms are used in
point-to-point connections (including hosted conferences).Only
some of the mechanisms are supported in MultiSite conferences.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
194
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Room analytics
The room analytics feature use several People presence detection
variables from the conference room
and re-uses them to analyze the room The video system has the capability to find whether or not people
utilization over time or per call. are present in the room. It takes a minimum of two minutes to
detect whether people are present or not in the room. After the
room becomes vacant, it may take up to two minutes for the
status to change.
This feature is based on ultrasound. It will not keep record of who
was in the room, only whether or not there are people present in
the room.
You can turn on/off the people presence detection from the web
interface. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration > RoomAnalytics > PeoplePresenceDetector.

Status
You may see the status at a given moment of people’s presence.
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Status >
RoomAnalytics.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
195
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface (page 1 of 2)

You can customize the user interface to allow control of In-room control architecture
peripherals in a meeting room, for example lights and blinds, or to
modify the video system’s behavior by triggering macros. You need a Cisco video system with a Touch 10 controller, and a
control system. The control system may be a third-party system,
This allows for the powerful combination of a control system’s such as Crestron or AMX, with hardware drivers for peripherals.
functionality and the video system's user-friendly user interface It is the control system, not the video system, that controls the
(Touch 10). peripherals.
When you program the control system you must use the video
system’s API (events and commands) in order to connect with the
controls on the video system's user interface.

Blinds

API
Touch 10
Climate

Video system Control system

Example in-room control panel

Lights
In-room
Consult the CE Customization guide for full details about how to control
design custom user interface panels (in-room control panels) editor
using the In-Room Control editor, and how to use the video
system’s API to program the in-room controls. Go to: Other...

► [Link]
In-room control schematics

The video system’s macro framework may also serve as a

control system. In this case the control system can use the video
system’s API to trigger all sorts of local functionality: Speed dial,
language selection, customized system reset, and much more.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
196
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface (page 2 of 2)

The In-Room Control editor The room simulator

You can use the room simulator to visualise how the in-
Free of charge editor Preview function room controls on the Touch 10 user interface changes the
state of the room.
An easy to use drag-and-drop editor, which you should The editor also provides a preview function, which allows
use to compose the custom user interface panels (in- you to see how the custom interfaces will appear on the Back up any existing in-room configuration
room control panels), comes free of charge with the video user interface. you may have before you export the simulator
system’s software. configuration to the video system. The
The preview function is also a complete software version simulator configuration will replace the existing
of your custom (in-room control) panels, so clicking the configuration on the video system.
controls will result in the same actions as selecting them
Sign in* to the web interface, and navigate to Integration > on the real Touch 10 user interface.
In‑Room Control.
Therefore, you can use the preview function to test your Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration >
• Click Launch Editor to launch the editor directly from
integrations without having a real Touch 10 user interface In‑Room Control.
the video system’s web interface.
available. You can also use the video system’s in-room • Click Launch Simulator to open a room simulator in
You can push a new in-room control panel to the controls from a remote location your browser.
video system, and see the result immediately on the
Touch controller. The room simulator contains a predefined in-room
control configuration that you can export to the video
• Click Download Editor to download a stand-alone
system. Then you can control the simulator’s virtual
version that you can run locally on your browser from
meeting room from your real Touch 10 user interface.
your hard drive.
• Click Load simulator config to export the simulator
Then you can compose your custom interfaces
configuration to the video system.
without being connected to a video system. You can
export and import to file to move your work between
your local version and the video system later.

*
You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL, INTEGRATOR, or
ADMIN user roles in order to access the In-Room Control editor and
the API commands that you need when programming the control
system.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
197
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Customize the video system's behavior using macros

With macros, you can create your own snippets of code that run Allow using macros on the video system The Macro editor
on the video system. The language is JavaScript / ECMAScript 6
with support for features such as arrow functions, promises and Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration. The Macro editor is a powerful tool where
classes. you can:
• Set Macros > Mode to On.
The macro framework allows an integrator to write scripts that • Load our code examples, which
If you try to launch the Macro editor while this setting is Off, a
tailor a video system's behavior to suite an individual customer's you can modify, use as is, or use as
pop-up message appears. If you respond by tapping Enable
requirements. The integrators can, for example, implement inspiration when writing your own
Macros, the Macros > Mode setting will automatically change
their own features or variations of features, automate specific macros.
to On, and the editor will launch.
configurations or re-configurations, and create custom tests and • Read our detailed macro scripting
monitoring functions. tutorial, which also explains the code
examples in more detailed.
Launch the macro editor • Write your own macros, and upload
By combining the use of macros and creation of a custom user Sign in* to the web interface, and navigate to Integration > Macro them to the video system.
interface panel (formerly referred to as in-room control panel), you Editor. • Enable/Disable individual macros.
can amend the user interface (Touch 10) to trigger customized
local functionality. For examples: We don't offer a stand-alone version of the editor that you can • Check in an embedded Log Console
use to work offline. what happens when you run a macro.
• Add speed dialling buttons
• Add a button for room reset, which set all configurations back
to your preferred default setup

Consult the CE Customization guide for details about macros and

how to use the video system's built in Macro editor. Go to:
► [Link]

*
You need a user that holds the ADMIN user role in order to access the Macro
editor.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
198
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Input source composition (page 1 of 2)

You can use the video system’s API to combine up to four input Source composition Layouts
sources in a single main video stream.
The maxmium number of different input sources depends on the
Composition layout Equal
video system:
You can choose between two layouts:
Maximum number of
• Equal
Video system different input sources
• PIP (only available when composing two input sources)
Room Kit, SX20 2
The layouts are fixed, so you cannot modify the image sizes, or
Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, 3 move the PIP.
MX200 G2, MX300 G2
The composition and layout can be modified at any time, both in Number of sources: 2
SX80, MX700, MX800 4 call and outside of call.
SX10, DX70, DX80 Not applicable
Selfview
Selfview shows the same composed image that is being sent to
the far end.

Number of sources: 3
Individual camera control
You can control individual cameras using API commands
(xCommand Camera *), but you cannot use the controls on the
user interface.
When you select a camera in the user interface, the main video
stream will automatically switch from the composed video stream
to the single stream from the chosen camera.
Number of sources: 4

Change compositions and layouts on demand

Input source composition is only available using API commands; Picture-in-Picture (PIP)
we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.
To be able to easily change compositions and layouts on demand,
we recommend that you use macros and create a custom user
interface panel (in-room control panel) for it.

Number of sources: 2

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
199
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Input source composition (page 2 of 2)

API command
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource Examples
ConnectorId: <1..n> SourceId: <1..m>
Layout: <Equal, PIP> xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 ConnectorId: 3 ConnectorId: 4 Layout: Equal
where
The input source can be identified by either
the physical connector that it is connected
to (ConnectorId), or by the logical source
identifier (SourceId). There cannot be a
mix of different types of identifiers in the
same command; use either ConnectorId or
SourceId. You can find these identifiers in
the Video Input Connector and Video Input xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 Layout: Equal
Source statuses.
The difference between the Equal and PIP
layouts (Layout) are shown in the sidebar.
Refer to the API-guide for more details.

xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource SourceId: 1 SourceId: 2 Layout: PIP

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
200
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Manage startup scripts

Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration > Startup About startup scripts
Scripts.
A startup script contains commands
(xCommand) and configurations
(xConfiguration) that will be executed as
part of the start up procedure.
A few commands and configurations
cannot be placed in a startup script,
List of startup scripts for example xCommand SystemUnit
You can create one or Boot. It is not possible to save a script
more startup scripts*. that contains illegal commands and
configurations.
A green dot appears next
to an active startup script; Syntax and semantics for xCommand and
a red ring appears next to xConfiguration are explained in the API
an inactive startup script. guide for the product.

If you have more than one

startup script, they will

run in the order from top The script names and configurations shown in the illustration serve as examples. You may make your own scripts.
to bottom of the list.
Run a startup script immediately
1. Select the startup script from the list.
Creat a startup script
2. Click Run.
1. Click Create new....
Both active and inactive startup scripts
2. Enter a name for the startup script in can be run immediately.
the title input field.

3. Enter the commands (xConfiguration Activate or deactivate a startup script

or xCommand) in the command
1. Select the startup script from the list.
input area. Start each command on
a new line. 2. Click On to activate, or Off to deactivate a script.
4. Click Save. Active startup scripts will run every time the
video system starts up.
5. Click On to activate the startup
script.
Delete a startup script
If you want to use an existing script as 1. Select the startup script from the list.
a starting point for editing, select that
script and click Copy. 2. Click Delete.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
201
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Access the video system’s XML files

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration > About the API
Developer API.
The application programming interface
Open an XML file (API) is a tool for integration professionals
The XML files are part of the video system’s API. They structure and developers working with the video
information about the system in a hierarchy. Click the file name to open the XML file. system. The API is described in detail in
the API guide for the video system.
• [Link] contains the current system settings
(configuration). These settings are controlled from the web
interface or from the API (Application Programmer Interface).
• The information in [Link] is constantly updated by the
video system to reflect system and process changes. The
status information is monitored from the web interface or from
the API.
• [Link] contains an overview of the commands
available to instruct the system to perform an action. The
commands are issued from the API.
• [Link] contains an overview of all the value spaces
of system settings, status information, and commands.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
202
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration > About the API
Developer API.
The application programming interface
(API) is a tool for integration professionals
Commands (xCommand) and configurations (xConfiguration) can and developers working with the video
be executed from the web interface. Syntax and semantics are system. The API is described in detail in
explained in the API guide for the video system. the API guide for the video system.

Execute API commands and configurations

1. Enter a command (xCommand or xConfiguration),
or a sequence of commands, in the text area.

2. Click Execute to issue the command(s).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
203
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Advanced customization of audio and GPIO

The CE Console application (previously TC Console), which is
a free software tool that runs on PC/Mac, provides a graphical
interface to the advanced customizable features of the codec.
CE Console includes the following modules:
GPIO
• Change the behavior of the GPIO, i.e. what the codec should
do when pins go high/low

Audio console
• Configure the audio system of the codec
• Change the default mixing, routing and equalizers
• Set various input and output connector properties

Video composition is not available for any video system in the

initial releases of CE Console. Audio console is only available for
SX80 in the initial release.
For more details about the functionality, see the
documentation included in the CE Console application
itself, or download the CE Console user guide from
► [Link] (navigate to Configure >
Configuration Guides).

How to obtain the CE Console application

Download the CE Console application for free from our web site.
Go to:
► [Link]
and navigate to Collaboration Endpoints > TelePresence
Integration Solutions > TC Console.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
204
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Serial interface
The video system has a standard COM-port for serial COM COM COM
communication. Connect a standard 9-pin RS-232 serial cable USB (9-pin, male) (9-pin, female) (9-pin, male)
to the COM-port. If the computer does not have a standard serial Video
Computer
connector, you need an RS-232 adapter on the computer side. system
RS-232 adapter Serial cable
The serial connection can be used without an IP-address, DNS, or
a network.
Parameters:
• Baud rate: Configurable. Default 115200 bps
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: None
• Stop bit: 1 Standard COM-port
(9-pin, female)
• Hardware flow control: Off

Video system settings

Serial communication is enabled by default. Use the following
configuration to change the behavior:
SerialPort > Mode
For security reasons, you are asked to sign in before using the
serial interface. Use the following setting to change the behavior:
SerialPort > LoginRequired
We recommend using the default baud rate because the video
system may give much feedback. Use the following setting if you
want to adjust the baud rate.
SerialPort > BaudRate
Restart the video system when you have made changes to the
serial port settings.
If your video system is provisioned by CUCM, the serial port
settings should be configured from CUCM.

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
205
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Open TCP Ports

The web server within the codec prohibit or restrict the use of TCP 4051: Remote pairing session connection The system settings are configured from
nonsecure or unnecessary ports, protocols, modules, and/or the Setup > Configuration page on the
services. Some ports are open or closed by default. The port is only available (and open) when a Touch panel is web interface. Open a web browser and
remote paired with the video system. You can close the port by enter the IP address of the video system
setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off. then sign in.
TCP 22: SSH
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
You can close the port by setting SSH mode to Off.
NetworkServices SSH Mode: Off / On TCP 4052: Remote pairing and forwarding
The port is only available (and open) when a Touch panel is
TCP 80: HTTP remote paired with the video system. You can close the port by
setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off.
You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off or HTTPS.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off

TCP 5060/5061: SIP listen ports

TCP 443: HTTPS
The SIP listen pors are open by default. The SIP listen ports are
You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off.
disabled by the Cisco UCM (Unified Communication Manager).
NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off You can close the ports by setting the SIP listen ports to Off.
SIP ListenPort: Off / On
TCP 4043: Remote pairing software download
You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On

TCP 4045: Remote pairing version information

You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On

TCP 4053: Remote pairing port

You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
206
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS

When a video system is added to Cisco TelePresence
Management Suite (TMS), it is automatically configured to
send information (events) back to TMS. The video system
receives the address that these events should be sent to from
TMS (HTTPFeedback address). If this address is absent or
misconfigured, the video system cannot send events to TMS.

Missing response to events

If the video system does not receive a response to an event, it will
retry sending it to the HTTPFeedback address up to 10 times at 1
second intervals.
If the video system does not receive a response to any of the
retries, the endpoint deletes the HTTPFeedback address and
cannot send events to TMS anymore.
This causes loss of Call Detail Records (CDR) on TMS.

Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS

In order to get a new address to send events to, you must restart
the video system and wait for the next management address push
from TMS (scheduled or triggered by the TMS administrator).

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
207
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Technical specification (page 1 of 2)

PRODUCT COMPATIBILITY • 1920 × 1080@25 Hz (1080p25) • 1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+) AUDIO STANDARDS
Fully compatible with standards-compliant • 1920 × 1080@24, and 23.97 Hz (1080p24) • 1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+) • 64 kbps and 128 kbps AAC-LD
telepresence and video systems • 1280 × 720@60, and 59.94 Hz (720p60) • 1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA) • G.722
• 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50) • G.722.1
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY One Composite/S-Video Input (BNC Connectors)
• 720 × 480@60, and 59.94 Hz (480p60) • G.711
• Cisco TelePresence Software Version TC7.1 or later • PAL/NTSC
• 640 × 480@60 Hz (480p60) • G.729AB
• Collaboration Endpoint Software Version 8.0 or later
• 1280 × 1024@60, and 75 Hz (SXGA) VIDEO OUTPUTS (THREE OUTPUTS)
BANDWIDTH AUDIO FEATURES
• 1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, and 85 Hz (XGA) Two HDMI outputs* and one DVI-I output
H.323 and SIP up to 6 Mbps point-to-point • 800 × 600@56, 60, 72, 75, and 85 Hz (SVGA) • High quality 20 kHz audio
Supports formats up to maximum
• 1920 × 1200@50 and 60 Hz (WUXGA) • Eight separate acoustic echo cancellers
Up to 6 Mpbs total MultiSite bandwidth 1920 × 1080@60fps (1080p60), including:
• 1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+) • Eight-port audio mixer
• 1920 × 1080@60 Hz (1080p60)
MINIMUM BANDWIDTH FOR RESOLUTION / FRAME • Eight assignable equlaizers
• 1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+) • 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50)
RATE (H.264) • Automatic gain control (AGC)
• 1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA) • 1280 × 720@60 Hz (720p60)
• 720p30 from 768 kbps • Automatic noise reduction
One DVI-I input • 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
• 720p60 from 1152 kbps • Active lip synchronization
• 1080p30 from 1472 kbps Analog (VGA or YPbPr); support formats up to VESA Monitor Power Management
maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps (1080p60), including: Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) AUDIO INPUTS (15 INPUTS)
• 1080p60 from 2560 kbps
• 1920 × 1080@60 Hz (1080p) • Eight microphones, 48 V phantom powered,
FIREWALL TRAVERSAL Supports encode/decode video formats up to Euroblock connector, each with separate echo
• 1280 × 720@60 Hz (720p)
• Cisco TelePresence Expressway technology maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps (HD1080p60), cancellers and noise reduction; all microphones can
• 1280 × 1024@60 and 75 Hz (SXGA) be set for balanced line level
• H.460.18 and H.460.19 firewall traversal including:
• 1280 × 960@60 Hz • Four balanced line level inputs, Euroblock connector
• SIP ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment) • 176 × 144@30 frames per second (fps) (QCIF)
• 1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, and 85 Hz (XGA) • Three HDMI inputs, digital, stereo (from PC/DVD)*
• 352 × 288@30 fps (CIF)
VIDEO STANDARDS • 1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+)
• 512 × 288@30 fps (w288p) AUDIO OUTPUTS (EIGHT OUTPUTS)
• H.261 • 1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+)
• 576 × 448@30 fps (448p) • Six balanced line level outputs, Euroblock connector
• H.263 • 1280 × 800@60 Hz (WXGA)
• 768 × 448@30 fps (w448p) • Two HDMI outputs*
• H.263+ • 1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA)
• 704 × 576@30 fps (4CIF)
• H.264 Digital (DVI-D); support formats up to maximum • 1024 × 576@30 fps (w576p) DUAL STREAM
• H.265 (SIP) 1920 × 1080@60 fps, including: • H.239 dual stream (H.323)
• 1280 × 720@30 fps (720p30)
• 1920 × 1080@60, 59.94 Hz (1080p60) • BFCP dual stream (SIP)
VIDEO FEATURES • 1920 × 1080@30 fps (1080p30)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50) • Support for resolutions up to 1920 × 1200 at 30 fps,
• Advanced screen layouts • 640 × 480@30 fps (VGA)
• 1920 × 1080@30, 29.97 Hz (1080p30) independent of main stream resolution
• Local auto-layout • 800 × 600@30 fps (SVGA)
• 1920 × 1080@25 Hz (1080p25)
• 1024 × 768@30 fps (XGA) MULTIPOINT SUPPORT
VIDEO INPUTS (FIVE INPUTS) • 1920 × 1080@24, 23.97 Hz (1080p24)
• 1280 × 1024@30 fps (SXGA) • Five-way embedded SIP/H.323 MultiPoint, ref.
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) • 1280 × 720@60, 59.94 Hz (720p60)
• 1280 × 768@30 fps (WXGA) MultiSite
HDCP is not supported • 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
• 1440 × 900@30 fps (WXGA+) • Cisco Ad-Hoc Conferencing (requires Cisco Unified
• 720 × 480@60, 59.94 Hz (480p60)
Three HDMI inputs* • 1680 × 1050@30 fps (WSXGA+) Communications Manager (CUCM), and Cisco
• 640 × 480@60 Hz (480p60) Meeting Server (CMS) or Cisco TelePresence
• 512 × 288@60 fps (w288p60)
Support formats up to maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps, • 1280 × 1024@60, 75 Hz (SXGA) Server with Cisco TelePresence Conductor)
including: • 768 × 448@60 fps (w448p60)
• 1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, 85 Hz (XGA) • Cisco Conferencing Active Control
• 1920 × 1080@60 and 59.94 Hz (1080p60) • 1024 × 576@60 fps (w576p60)
• 800 × 600@56, 60, 72, 75, 85 Hz (SVGA)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50) • 1280 × 720@60 fps (720p60)
• 1920 × 1080@30 and 29.97 Hz (1080p30) • 1920 × 1080@60 fps (1080p60)
*
HDMI version 1.4

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
208
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Technical specification (page 2 of 2)

MULTISITE FEATURES • TCP/IP SYSTEM MANAGEMENT OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY:
(EMBEDDED MULTIPOINT) • DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) • Support for the Cisco TelePresence Management • Ambient temperature: 32°F to 104°F
• Five-way 720p30, three-way and four-way • IEEE 802.1x network authentication Suite (TMS) (0°C to 40°C)
1080p30 MultiSite • IEEE 802.1q VLAN • Management via embedded Telnet, SSH, XML, and • Relative humidity (RH): 10% to 90%
• Full individual audio and video transcoding • IEEE 802.1p QoS and class of service SOAP
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE:
• Individual layouts in MultiSite continuous presence • ClearPath • Full application programming interface (APIs)
• –4°F to 140°F (–20°C to 60°C) at RH 10% to 90%
• H.323/SIP/VoIP in the same conference • Remote software upload via web server, SCP,
IPV6 NETWORK SUPPORT (non-condensing)
• Support for Presentation (H.239/BFCP) from any HTTP, and HTTPS
participant at resolutions up to 1080p15 • Dual-stack IPv4 and IPv6 for DHCP, SSH, HTTP, • One RS-232 for local control and diagnostics DIMENSIONS
• Best Impression (automatic continuous presence HTTPS, DNS and DiffServ
• Support for Cisco TelePresence Touch 10 • Width: 442 mm / 17.4 in.
layouts) • Support for static IP address assignment, stateless
• Height: 44 mm / 1.7 in.
• H.264, encryption and dual stream from any site autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 DIRECTORY SERVICES
• Depth: 310 mm / 12.2 in.
• IP downspeeding CISCO UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER • Support for local directories (Favorites)
• Weight: 3.65 kg / 8.05 lbs
• Dial in and dial out • Corporate directory (through CUCM and Cisco
(requires Cisco UCM version 8.6 or later)
• Conference rates up to 10 Mbps TMS) APPROVALS AND COMPLIANCE
• Native registration with Cisco Unified • Server directory supporting LDAP and H.350 • Directive 2014/35/EU (Low-Voltage Directive)
PROTOCOLS Communications Manager (CUCM) (requires Cisco TMS) • Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Directive) – Class A
• H.323 and SIP (dual call stack support) • Basic CUCM provisioning • Call history with received, placed and missed calls • Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS)
• ISDN (requires Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link) • Firmware upgrade from CUCM with date and time
• Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)
• Cisco Discovery Protocol and DHCP option 150
EMBEDDED ENCRYPTION support POWER
• NRTL approved (Product Safety)
• H.323 and SIP point-to-point • Basic telephony features such as hold, resume, • Autosensing power supply • FCC CFR 47 Part 15B (EMC) – Class A
• Standards-based: H.235 v3 and Advanced transfer, and corporate directory lookup • 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Encryption Standard (AES) • Power consumption under normal operating Please check Product Approval Status Database
SECURITY FEATURES [Link] for approval documents per
• Automatic key generation and exchange conditions as defined in IEC 60950-1: 99 W
• Management using HTTPS and SSH country.
• Supported in dual stream
• IP administration password
IP NETWORK FEATURES • Administration menu password
• DNS lookup for service configuration • Disable IP services
• Differentiated services (QoS) • Network settings protection
• IP adaptive bandwidth management (including flow
control) NETWORK INTERFACES
• Auto gatekeeper discovery • One LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100/1000 Mbps
• Dynamic playout and lip-sync buffering • Two LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) interfaces to be used for
• H.245 DTMF tones in H.323 Cisco TelePresence peripherals
• RFC 4733 DTMF tones in SIP OTHER INTERFACES
• Date and time support via NTP
• Two USB host for future use
• Packet loss based downspeeding All specifications are subject to change without notice, system specifics may vary.
• GPIO
• URI dialing All images in these materials are for representational purposes only, actual products may differ.
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other
countries. A listing of Cisco’s trademarks can be found at [Link]/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks
mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership
relationship between Cisco and any other company.
April 2018

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
209
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

Supported RFCs
The RFC (Request for Comments) series contains technical CE software supports a range of RFCs, including the following:
and organizational documents about the Internet, including
• RFC 2782 DNS RR for specifying the location of services
the technical specifications and policy documents produced
(DNS SRV)
by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
• RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
• RFC 3263 Locating SIP Servers
• RFC 3361 DHCP Option for SIP Servers
• RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time
Applications
• RFC 3711 The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)
• RFC 4091 The Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT)
Semantics for the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Grouping Framework
• RFC 4092 Usage of the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT) Semantics in the
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
• RFC 4582 The Binary Floor Control Protocol
draft-ietf-bfcpbis-rfc4582bis-00 Revision of the Binary Floor
Control Protocol (BFCP) for use over an unreliable transport
• RFC 4733 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones and
Telephony Signals
• RFC 5245 Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE): A
Protocol for Network Address Translator (NAT) Traversal for
Offer/Answer Protocols
• RFC 5589: SIP Call Control Transfer
• RFC 5766 Traversal Using Relays around NAT (TURN): Relay
Extensions to Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN)
• RFC 5905 Network Time Protocol Version 4: Protocol and
Algorithms Specification

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
210
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Appendices

User documentation on the Cisco web site

The documents are organized in the following categories - some documents are not available for all products:
Use the following short-links to find the documentation for
the product series running CE software. Install and Upgrade > Install and Upgrade Guides Reference Guides > Command references
• Installation guides: How to install the product • API reference guides: Reference guide for the
Room Series: • Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to Application Programmer Interface (API)
get the system up and running
► [Link] Reference Guides > Technical References
• RCSI guide: Regulatory compliance and safety
information • CAD drawings: 2D CAD drawings with measurements
MX Series:
Maintain and Operate > Maintain and Operate Guides Configure > Configuration Guides
► [Link]
• Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to • CE Customization guide: How to design an in-room
get the system up and running control panel, and how to use the video system’s API to
SX Series: program the in-room controls
• Administrator guide: Information required to administer
► [Link] your product • CE Console user guide: How to use the CE Console
• Deployment guide for TelePresence endpoints on application, which provides a graphical interface to
CUCM: Tasks to perform to start using the video system advanced customizable features of the video system
DX Series:
with the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
► [Link] (CUCM) Design > Design Guides

• Spare parts overview, Spare parts replacement guides, • Video conferencing room guidelines: General guidelines
Cable schemas: Useful information when replacing for room design and best practice
In general, you can find user documentation for all Cisco spare parts • Video conferencing room guidelines: Things to do to
Collaboration endpoints at ► [Link] improve the perceived audio quality
telepresence/docs Maintain and Operate > End-User Guides
• User guides: How to use the product Software Downloads, Release and General Information >
Licensing Information
• Quick reference guides: How to use the product
• Open source documentation: Licenses and notices for
• Physical interface guide: Details about the codec’s
open source software used in this product
physical interface, including the connector panel and
LEDs
Software Downloads, Release and General Information >
Release Notes
• Software release notes

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
211
 Cisco TelePresence SX80 Administrator Guide

 Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance System settings Appendices

Intellectual property rights

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS
MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS,
INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE
ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION
OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING

PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH
THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU
ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY,
CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a

program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s
public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright
© 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT

FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR
TRADE PRACTICE.

Cisco contacts IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
On our web site you will find an overview of the worldwide Cisco contacts. LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS
Go to: ► [Link] SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document
Corporate Headquarters are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples,
Cisco Systems, Inc. command display output, network topology diagrams, and other figures included
in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual
170 West Tasman Dr.
IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and
San Jose, CA 95134 USA coincidental.

All printed copies and duplicate soft copies are considered un-Controlled copies
and the original on-line version should be referred to for latest version.

Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax
numbers are listed on the Cisco website at [Link]/go/offices.

Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/
or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks,
go to this URL: [Link]/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned
are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not
imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)

Cisco product security overview

This product contains cryptographic features and is subject to United States and
local country laws governing import, export, transfer, and use. Delivery of Cisco
cryptographic products does not imply third-party authority to import, export,
distribute, or use encryption. Importers, exporters, distributors, and users are
responsible for compliance with U.S. and local country laws. By using this product
you agree to comply with applicable laws and regulations. If you are unable to
comply with U.S. and local laws, return this product immediately.

Further information regarding U.S. export regulations may be found at

[Link]

D15328.11 SX80 Administrator Guide CE9.4, JUNE 2018. [Link] — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
212